UNIVERGE SV8100 - General Description Manual

UNIVERGE SV8100 - General Description Manual
Notice
Note that when converting this document from its original format to a
.pdf file, some minor font and format changes may occur. When
viewing and printing this document, we cannot guarantee that your
specific PC or printer will support all of the fonts or graphics.
Therefore, when you view the document, fonts may be substituted and
your individual printer may not have the capability to print the
document correctly.
®
General Description Manual
INT-2069
Issue 10.0
(Version 7000)
NEC Corporation of America reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or features at any
time without notice.
NEC Corporation of America has prepared this document for use by its employees and customers. The
information contained herein is the property of NEC Corporation of America and shall not be reproduced
without prior written approval of NEC Corporation of America.
Dterm, NEAX and UNIVERGE are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation and Electra Elite is a
registered trademark of NEC America, Inc. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
AT&T, the AT&T logo and all other AT&T marks are trademarks of AT&T Intellectual Property and/or
AT&T affiliated companies. Lucent Technologies is a trademark or service mark of Lucent Technologies
Inc. Nortel Networks and the Nortel Networks logo are trademarks of Nortel Networks. Verizon Wireless
is a trademark of Verizon Trademark Services, LLC. Pentium is a trademark or registered trademark of
Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. AutoTalk is a trademark of
Uniden America Corporation. ViewCall and ViewMail are registered trademarks of Active Voice, LLC.
Adobe, Flash and Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems, Incorporated in the United
States and/or other countries. GOOGLE is a trademark of Google Inc. Mozilla and Firefox are registered
trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation. SonicView is a trademark of TriVium Systems, Inc. iPhone is a
registered trademark of Apple Inc. App StoreSM is a service mark of Apple Inc. Salesforce.com is a
registered trademark of Salesforce.com, inc.
Copyright 2012
NEC Corporation of America
6535 N. State Highway 161
Irving, TX 75039-2402
Communications Technology Group
Preface
GENERAL INFORMATION
The UNIVERGE SV8100 system is a feature-rich key system that provides over 170 features including
Computer Telephony Integration, Automatic Call Distribution, Uniform Call Distribution, ISDN-BRI
Voice Trunks, ISDN-PRI Voice Trunks, IP Telephony, Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) trunks and
stations, and many others.
The UNIVERGE SV8100 system provides what the customer needs today and, as business expands,
the system can be expanded to grow as well.
The UNIVERGE SV8100 system has a set of manuals that provide all the information necessary to
install and support the system. The manuals are described in this preface.
THIS MANUAL
This manual provides general information about the system, its features, system configuration, and
standards. This manual provides an overview of the UNIVERGE SV8100 system and is useful when
presenting information to potential customers.
Chapter 1 – Introduction
This chapter provides an overview and a brief description of the system.
Chapter 2 – Features
This chapter provides a list of features that are available with the system. Each feature is briefly
described.
Chapter 3 – Equipment
This chapter provides a list and brief description of the equipment that is available with the system.
Chapter 4 – Installation, Programming, and Maintenance Overview
This chapter briefly describes the installation, programming functions, and maintenance of the system.
Chapter 5 – Hardware Specifications
This chapter provides requirements and specifications relating to the system hardware. This chapter is
helpful to those that install the system.
SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS
UNIVERGE SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual
This manual provides detailed information concerning every feature available in the system.
UNIVERGE SV8100 System Hardware Manual
The System Hardware Manual is provided for the system installer. This manual has detailed instructions
for installing the UNIVERGE SV8100 chassis, blades, multiline terminals, and optional equipment.
UNIVERGE SV8100 Programming Manual
This manual provides instructions for programming the UNIVERGE SV8100 system using a multiline
terminal or PC.
UNIVERGE SV8100 PC Programming Manual
This manual describes the operation of the PCPro program for the UNIVERGE SV8100 system. This
program is a user-friendly Windows® application that allows the user to program and configure features
of the UNIVERGE SV8100 system from the PC environment.
Regulatory
GENERAL INFORMATION
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA.
On the equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format:
US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.
The telephone company may change its technical operations and procedures. When such changes
affect the compatibility or use of the UNIVERGE SV8100 system, the telephone company is required
to give adequate notice of the changes for you to maintain uninterrupted service.
The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line.
Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming
call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the
number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local
telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is the
product identifier in format: US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without
a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3).
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utilities commission,
public service commission or corporation commission for information.
For single and two-line equipment that connects to the telephone network via a plug and jack, the plug
and jack used with this equipment must comply with FCC Part 68 rules.
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must
comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant
telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It must be connected to a compatible
modular jack that is also compliant.
General Description Manual
R-1
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
TELEPHONE/SERVICE PROVIDER COMPANY NOTIFICATION
Before connecting this telephone system to the telephone network, the following information must be
provided to the telephone company:
1.
Your telephone number.
2.
FCC registration number:
For the SV8100 CHS2U-US use SN1750 CYGMA:

When the system is to be installed as a Key Function system (no dial access to Trunk Groups/
Route Advance Blocks), use the following number:
US:NIFKF07BSN1750

When the system is to be installed as a Multifunction system, use the following number:
US:NIFMF07BSN1750

When the system is to be installed as a PBX system, use the following number:
US:NIFPF07BSN1750
Ringer Equivalence Number (REN): 0.7B
USOC jacks required: RJ11C, RJEX, RJ2FX, RJ2HX, RJ48C, RJ21X
INCIDENCE OF HARM
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in
advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice is not
practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised
of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
The telephone company may change its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect
the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice for
you to make necessary modifications to maintain interrupted service.
REPAIR SERVICE REQUIREMENTS
If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you
disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
If equipment malfunctions, all repairs must be performed by an authorized agent of NEC Unified
Solutions, Inc. or by NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. The user requiring service is responsible for reporting
the need for service to an NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. authorized agent or to NEC Unified Solutions, Inc.
R-2
Regulatory
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
PRIVATE (LEASED) LINES
For Private (Leased) Line (Analog Data Format) equipment, type JM8 jack is required. Refer to ATIS
Technical Report No. 5 for details on this connector.
The Facility Interface Code (FIC) associated with each private line application represents the type of
service that is provided by the telephone company. The user instructions must contain a detailed list of
private line ports and the associated FICs for which the equipment has been approved. In addition, the
Service Order Code (SOC) must also be included for analog systems. The SOC indicates the degree of
network protection provided by the equipment.
For Private (Leased) Line (Digital Format) equipment, in addition to the general requirements for all
equipment, certain digital connections require that an encoded analog content and billing protection
affidavit be provided the telephone company. Customer instructions must contain information on the
preparation and submission of the affidavit.
To comply with state tariffs, the telephone company must be given notification prior to connection. In
some states, the state public utility commission, public service commission or corporation commission
must give prior approval of connection.
TOLL RESTRICTION AND LEAST COST ROUTING EQUIPMENT
The consumer/purchaser/supplier instructions accompanying this equipment and/or software features
must contain the following notice:

The software contained in the UNIVERGE SV8100 to allow user access to the network must be
upgraded to recognize newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are
placed into service.

Failure to upgrade the premises systems or peripheral equipment to recognize the new codes as
they are established will restrict the customer and the customer’s employees from gaining access
to the network and these codes.
DIRECT INWARD DIALING
ALLOWING THIS EQUIPMENT TO BE OPERATED IN SUCH A MANNER AS TO NOT PROVIDE
FOR PROPER ANSWER SUPERVISION IS A VIOLATION OF PART 68 OF THE FCC RULES.
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) must contain the following:
Proper Answer Supervision is when:

This equipment returns answer supervision to the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)
when Direct Inward Dialing (DID) calls are:

Answered by the called station.

Answered by the Attendant.
General Description Manual
R-3
Issue 10.0

UNIVERGE SV8100

Routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the Customer Premise
Equipment (CPE) user.

Routed to a dial prompt.
This equipment returns answer supervision on all DID calls forwarded to the Public Switched
Telephone Network (PSTN). Permissible exceptions are:

A call is unanswered.

A busy tone is received.

A reorder tone is received.
VOICE ANNOUNCEMENT/MONITORING OVER DID LINES
When using voice announcement or monitoring over DID Lines, observe the following.
CAUTION
Using the Voice Announcement feature to eavesdrop or record sound activities at the other end of the
telephone line may be illegal under certain circumstances and laws. Consult a legal advisor before
implementing any practice to monitor or record a telephone conversation. Some federal and state laws
require a party monitoring or recording a telephone to use a beep-tone(s), notify all parties to the
telephone conversation and/or obtain consent of all parties to the telephone conversation. In monitoring
or recording sound activities at the other end of the telephone line using the Voice Announcement
feature, the sound of the alert tone at the beginning of the Voice Announcement may or may not be
considered sufficient under applicable laws. Some of the applicable laws provide for strict penalties for
illegal monitoring or recording of telephone conversations.
EQUAL ACCESS REQUIREMENTS
If equipment such as Private Branch Exchanges (PBX), key systems or customer-owned coin/credit card
telephones is sold to a call aggregator, it must be able to provide users access to interstate providers of
operator services through the use of access codes. Modification of this equipment by call aggregators to
block access dialing codes is a violation of the Telephone Operator Consumers Act of 1990.
ELECTRICAL SAFETY ADVISORY
Parties responsible for equipment requiring AC power should consider including an advisory notice in
their customer information suggesting the customer use a surge arrestor. Telephone companies report
that electrical surges, typically lightening transients, are very destructive to customer terminal equipment
connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem.
R-4
Regulatory
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
HEARING AID COMPATIBILITY
NEC Multiline Terminals and NEC Single Line Telephones that are provided for this system are hearing
aid compatible. The manufacturer of other Single Line Telephones for use with the system must provide
notice of hearing aid compatibility to comply with FCC rules that now prohibit the use of non-hearing aid
compatible telephones.
MUSIC ON HOLD
IMPORTANT NOTE
"In accordance with U.S. Copyright Law, a license may be required from the American Society of Composers,
Authors and Publishers, or other similar organization, if radio or TV broadcasts are transmitted through the Music
On Hold feature of this telecommunication system. NEC Unified Solutions, Inc., hereby disclaims any liability
arising out of the failure to obtain such a license."
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE
In compliance with FCC Part 15 rules, the following statement is provided:
IMPORTANT NOTE
“This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used
in accordance with the System Hardware Manual, may cause interference to radio communications.
This equipment has been tested and approved for compliance with the limits for a Class B (except as
noted below) computing device pursuant to subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, that are designed to
provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment.
Operation of this telephone system in a residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case, the
user, at his or her own expense, is required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the
interference.”
When equipped with the CHS2U-US Chassis and MPS7101 PSU, the UNIVERGE SV8100 can be operated
as a Class B device except when using one of the items in the following table. The system then becomes a Class
A device that may not be used in a residential area.
CD-PVAA
CD-CCTA
CD-VM00
PZ-32IPLA/
PZ-32IPLB
PZ-64IPLA/
PZ-64IPLB
PZ-128IPLA/
PZ-128IPLB
General Description Manual
PZ-VM21
CD-ETIA
R-5
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
SAFETY INFORMATION
This equipment has been certified by Canadian Standards Association and found to comply with all
applicable requirements:

CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 0-M – General Requirements – Canadian Electrical Code, Part II

CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-03 – Safety of Information Technology Equipment – Part l: General
Requirements

UL 60950-1-SAFETY, 1st Edition – Safety of Information Technology Equipment – Part I: General
Requirements
INDUSTRY CANADA REQUIREMENTS
Industry Canada has established rules that permit this telephone system to be directly connected to the
telephone network. Prior to the connection or disconnection of this telephone system to or from the
telephone network, the telephone company must be provided with the following information.
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada Technical Specifications/Le present material est
conforme aux specifications techniques applicables d’industrie Canada.
1. Your telephone number.
2. IC registration number:
IC: 140L-SN1750
3. Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) of the equipment: 0.7
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the
facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an
acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above
conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier.
Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the
telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility,
telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, when present, are connected together. This
precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
R-6
Regulatory
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
CAUTION
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the applicable
electrical inspection authority or electrician.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to
be connected to the telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any
combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of RENs of all the devices does not
exceed five/L’indice d’equivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert a indiquer le nombre maximal de terminaus
qui peuvent etre raccordes a une interface telephonique. La terminaison d’une interface peut consister
en une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, a la seule condition que la somme d’indices
d’equivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n’excede pas 5.
This equipment has been certified by the Canadian Standards Association and found to comply with all
applicable requirements of the standard for telephone equipment C 22.2 No. 225.
This equipment meets IC requirements CS03, PART II, PART III, PART VI.
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus
as set out in the radio interference regulations of Industry Canada/Le present appareil numerique n’emet
pas de bruits radioelectriques depassant les limites applicables aux appareils numeriques de Classe A
prescrites dans le reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par Industrie Canada.
BATTERY DISPOSAL
The UNIVERGE SV8100 system includes the batteries listed below. When disposing of these batteries,
you must comply with applicable federal and state regulations regarding proper disposal procedures.
Table R-1 Battery Types and Quantities for Chassis and Blades
Unit Name
Type of Battery
Quantity
CD-CP00-US
Lithium
1
CC-CP00
Lithium
1
CT-12 Headset Cordless
Ni MH
1
DTH-4R-(1)/(2)
Ni MH
1
DTL-8R-1
Ni MH
1
DTR-1HM-1 TEL
Lithium
1
DTR-1R-2
Nickel-Cadmium
1
DTR-4R-(1)/(2) TEL
Nickel-Cadmium
1
Lead Acid
1
Ni MH
1
DTU-4R-1 TEL
C124 (SIP DECT Wireless)
General Description Manual
R-7
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table R-1 Battery Types and Quantities for Chassis and Blades (Continued)
Unit Name
Type of Battery
Quantity
Sealed Lead
6
Ni MH
1
Sealed Lead
2
Bluetooth® Cordless Handset
Lithium-ion
1
G955 Wireless
Lithium-ion
1
Sealed Lead
2
Lithium-ion
1
CHS LARGE BATT SET
Headset Cordless II
Internal Batteries
CHSGW SMALL BATT SET
MH240 Wireless
The SV8100 CD-CP00-US provides memory backup for approximately three years. The Lithium battery
should be replaced every two years.
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL
DO NOT PLACE USED BATTERIES IN YOUR REGULAR TRASH! THE PRODUCT YOU
PURCHASED CONTAINS LITHIUM, NICKEL-CADMIUM OR SEALED LEAD BATTERIES. LITHIUM,
NICKEL-CADMIUM OR SEALED LEAD BATTERIES MUST BE COLLECTED, RECYCLED, OR
DISPOSED OF IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY SOUND MANNER.
The incineration, landfilling or mixing of nickel-cadmium or sealed lead batteries with the municipal solid
waste stream is PROHIBITED BY LAW in most areas. Contact your local solid waste management
officials for other information regarding the environmentally sound collection, recycling, and disposal of
the battery.
Nickel-Cadmium (or sealed lead) batteries must be returned to a federal or state approved
nickel-cadmium (or sealed lead) battery recycler. This may be where the batteries were originally sold or
a local seller of automotive batteries. Contact your local waste management officials for other
information regarding the environmentally sound collection, recycling and disposal of the battery
contained in this product. For Ni-Cd batteries, you can also call 1-800-8-BATTERYSM when further
information is required.
The packaging for the UNIVERGE SV8100 system contains the following labels regarding proper
disposal.
R-8
Regulatory
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
PRODUCT PACKAGE LABELING
CONTAINS NICKEL-CADMIUM BATTERY.
BATTERY MUST BE RECYCLED OR
DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. MUST NOT BE
DISPOSED OF IN MUNICIPAL WASTE.
Ni-Cd
CONTAINS SEALED LEAD BATTERY.
BATTERY MUST BE RECYCLED. MUST NOT
BE DISPOSED OF IN MUNICIPAL WASTE.
Pb
CONTAINS NICKEL-METAL HYDRIDE
BATTERY. BATTERY MUST BE RECYCLED
OR DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. MUST NOT
BE DISPOSED OF IN MUNICIPAL WASTE.
Ni-MH
General Description Manual
R-9
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
EUROPEAN UNION INFORMATION
Notice to the user
The system described in this manual is intended to be connected to analog and digital networks and
supports a wide range of peripheral equipment. The following interfaces are available for connection to
public analog and digital telecommunication networks:

TBR3
ISDN basic rate interface

TBR4
ISDN primary rate interface

ES203-021 Analogue interface
To take advantage of all features of this system and the connected equipment, the country or network
specific features should match the supported features of the system. For an overview of the supported
features, refer to the detailed documentation that comes with this system, contact your local NEC Unified
Solutions B.V. representative or the support desk of NEC Unified Solutions B.V.
Declaration of conformity
Hereby, “NEC Unified Solutions B.V.”, declares that the SV8100 is in compliance with the essential
requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
For the Declaration of Conformity, visit:
http://www.nec-unified.com/company/256-109/Declaration-of-Conformity.html
Electromagnetic Compatibility
For the SV8100 system the following warning is applicable:
Warning
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which
case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
R-10
Regulatory
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
PRODUCT DISPOSAL INFORMATION
For Countries in the European Union
The symbol depicted here has been affixed to your product to inform you that
electrical and electronic products should not be disposed of as municipal
waste.
Electrical and electronic products including the cables, plugs and accessories
should be disposed of separately in order to allow proper treatment, recovery
and recycling. These products should be taken to a designated facility where
the best available treatment, recovery and recycling techniques are available.
Separate disposal has significant advantages: valuable materials can be reused and it prevents the dispersion of unwanted substances into the municipal
waste stream. This contributes to the protection of human health and the
environment.
Please be informed that a fine may be imposed for illegal disposal of electrical
and electronic products via the general municipal waste stream.
To facilitate separate disposal and environmentally sound recycling arrangements have been made for
local collection and recycling. In case your electrical and electronic products need to be disposed of
please refer to your supplier or the contractual agreements that your company has made upon
acquisition of these products.
At http://www.nec-unified.com/weee/ you can find information about separate disposal and
environmentally sound recycling.
Battery information
Defective or exhausted batteries should never be disposed of as municipal waste. Return old batteries to
the battery supplier, a licensed battery dealer or a designated collection facility. Do not incinerate
batteries. This product uses Lithium batteries. Do not use any other type.
For an overview of the location of batteries used in these systems, the battery replacement or removal
instructions, please refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 System Hardware Manual.
General Description Manual
R-11
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
- - NOTES - -
R-12
Regulatory
TABLE OF CONTENTS
___________________________________________________________________________________
Chapter 1 Introduction to UNIVERGE SV8100
Section 1
System Overview......................................................................... 1-1
Section 2
UNIVERGE SV8100 System Capacities ..................................... 1-2
Section 3
SV8100 Digital and IP Multiline Telephone Line Up ................. 1-4
3.1
Modular Design............................................................................. 1-4
3.2
Digital and IP Telephones............................................................. 1-5
3.3
3.2.1
Digital Telephones ...................................................................... 1-5
3.2.2
IP Telephones............................................................................. 1-6
3.2.3
Terminal Category Reference..................................................... 1-8
3.2.4
Upgradeable Telephone Options .............................................. 1-10
Equipment and Applications Overview ....................................... 1-11
Chapter 2 Features
Section 1
Overview....................................................................................... 2-1
Section 2
IPK II to UNIVERGE SV8100 Feature Comparison List ............ 2-1
Section 3
Features Descriptions ................................................................. 2-9
Chapter 3 Equipment
Section 1
Equipment List............................................................................. 3-1
Section 2
Weights and Dimensions .......................................................... 3-11
___________________________________________________________________________________
General Description Manual
i
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________
Chapter 4 Installation, Programming, and Maintenance Overview
Section 1
Installation and Technical Considerations ............................... 4-1
Section 2
Programming............................................................................... 4-3
Section 3
Maintenance ................................................................................ 4-4
Chapter 5 Hardware Specifications
Section 1
System Capacities ...................................................................... 5-1
1.1
System Chassis Capacities ..........................................................5-1
1.2
System Blade Capacities ..............................................................5-5
1.3
System Trunk/Port/Channel Capacities ......................................5-13
Section 2
Chassis Power Based Calculator Chart.................................. 5-16
Section 3
Traffic Capacity ......................................................................... 5-20
Section 4
Cabling Requirements and Specifications ............................. 5-21
Section 5
Power Requirements ................................................................ 5-24
Section 6
5.1
Power Supply Specifications.......................................................5-24
5.2
Power Supply Consumption........................................................5-25
Environmental Conditions ....................................................... 5-25
6.1
Temperature and Humidity .........................................................5-25
6.2
Outside Line Types .....................................................................5-26
6.3
Transmission, Network, and Control Specifications....................5-27
6.3.1
Transmission.............................................................................5-27
6.3.2
Network .....................................................................................5-27
6.3.3
Control.......................................................................................5-27
___________________________________________________________________________________
ii
Table of Contents
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
___________________________________________________________________________________
6.4
6.3.4
Electra Elite IPK Terminals and Equipment .............................. 5-28
6.3.5
Series i Terminals ..................................................................... 5-29
Dialing Specifications.................................................................. 5-29
6.4.1
Dial Pulse Address Signaling.................................................... 5-29
6.4.2
Dual-Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) Address Signaling ............. 5-29
6.4.3
External Equipment Connection ............................................... 5-30
6.4.4
Music Source for Music on Hold via Chassis............................ 5-30
6.4.5
Music Source for Station Background Music via ACI................ 5-30
6.4.6
External Paging (Audio) ............................................................ 5-30
6.4.7
External Tone Ringer/Night Chime Output ............................... 5-31
6.4.8
SMDR Output............................................................................ 5-31
6.4.9
PC Connection.......................................................................... 5-31
6.4.10 Relay Contact ........................................................................... 5-31
Section 7
Section 8
Section 9
Battery Backup .......................................................................... 5-31
7.1
System Backup (Optional) .......................................................... 5-31
7.2
Memory Backup.......................................................................... 5-31
SV8100 Migration....................................................................... 5-32
8.1
Description.................................................................................. 5-32
8.2
Conditions................................................................................... 5-32
Audible and Visual Indication .................................................. 5-32
9.1
Tone Patterns ............................................................................. 5-32
9.2
Multiline Terminal LED Flash Patterns ....................................... 5-32
___________________________________________________________________________________
General Description Manual
- iii
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
iv
Table of Contents
LIST OF FIGURES
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 1-1
UNIVERGE SV8100 CHS2U GW-US 9.5” Chassis ...................................................... 1-2
Figure 1-2
UNIVERGE SV8100 CHS2U-US 19” Chassis Expandability ........................................ 1-2
Figure 1-3
UNIVERGE SV8100 CHS2U B-US and CHS2U E Chassis Expandability ................... 1-3
Figure 1-4
UNIVERGE SV8100 Telephone Modular Design .......................................................... 1-4
Figure 1-5
Simplified SV8100 System (9.5” Gateway and Base) Connectivity ............................ 1-12
Figure 1-6
Simplified SV8100 System (19”) Connectivity ............................................................. 1-12
Figure 1-7
Simplified SV8100 System (9.5” Base and Expansion) Connectivity .......................... 1-13
Figure 5-1
Base and Expansion Chassis ........................................................................................ 5-1
Figure 5-2
UNIVERGE SV8100 CHS2U GW-US Chassis ............................................................. 5-2
Figure 5-3
CHS2U B-US Base and CHS2U E Expansion Chassis ................................................ 5-4
Figure 5-4
Connecting the DLC Using Twisted 2-Pair Cable ....................................................... 5-21
___________________________________________________________________________________
General Description Manual
v
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
___________________________________________________________________________________
vi
List of Figures
LIST OF TABLES
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table R-1
Battery Types and Quantities for Chassis and Blades ................................................. R-7
Table 1-1
Terminal Category Reference Chart (DT300/DT700) ................................................... 1-8
Table 1-2
Connectivity of Options ............................................................................................... 1-10
Table 2-1
Feature Comparison List ............................................................................................... 2-1
Table 2-2
Selectable Display Messaging Defaults ...................................................................... 2-71
Table 3-1
Chassis Equipment List ................................................................................................. 3-1
Table 3-2
Chassis Installation Equipment List ............................................................................... 3-1
Table 3-3
Battery Mount Equipment List ....................................................................................... 3-2
Table 3-4
Blade Equipment List .................................................................................................... 3-2
Table 3-5
Cable Equipment List .................................................................................................... 3-3
Table 3-6
Digital Multiline Terminal (DT300 Series) Equipment List ............................................. 3-4
Table 3-7
IP Multiline Terminal (DT700 Series) Equipment List .................................................... 3-5
Table 3-8
SV8100 Optional Equipment List .................................................................................. 3-5
Table 3-9
SV8100 Weights and Dimensions ............................................................................... 3-11
Table 5-1
9.5” Gateway and 19” Maximum System Capacities – Chassis .................................... 5-2
Table 5-2
9.5” Base and Expansion Maximum System Capacities – Chassis .............................. 5-5
Table 5-3
SV8100 Maximum 9.5” Gateway and 19” System Capacities – Blades ....................... 5-6
Table 5-4
SV8100 Maximum 9.5” Base and Expansion System Capacities – Blades ................. 5-9
Table 5-5
Daughter Board Combinations .................................................................................... 5-13
Table 5-6
SV8100 9.5” Gateway and 19” Maximum System
Capacities – Trunks/Ports/Channels ........................................................................... 5-14
Table 5-7
SV8100 9.5” (Base and Expansion) Maximum System
Capacities – Trunks/Ports/Channels ........................................................................... 5-15
Table 5-8
Board Power Factor .................................................................................................... 5-16
___________________________________________________________________________________
General Description Manual
vii
Issue
10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 5-9
Maximum Number of Packages Installed .................................................................... 5-17
Table 5-10
Terminal Power Factor ................................................................................................ 5-18
Table 5-11
IP Terminal Power Chart ............................................................................................. 5-19
Table 5-12
IEEE802.af Class Specifications ................................................................................. 5-19
Table 5-13
Traffic Capacity ........................................................................................................... 5-20
Table 5-14
DT300 Series Loop Resistance and Cable Length ..................................................... 5-22
Table 5-15
DT700 Series Loop Resistance and Cable Length ..................................................... 5-22
Table 5-16
Dterm Series i or Dterm IP Terminal Loop Resistance and Cable Length ..................... 5-23
Table 5-17
Cable Connection Between the Analog Port and the Single Line Equipment ............. 5-23
Table 5-18
Cabling Requirements ................................................................................................. 5-24
Table 5-19
Power Consumption .................................................................................................... 5-25
Table 5-20
Tone Patterns .............................................................................................................. 5-33
Table 5-21
Multiline Terminal LED Flash Pattern .......................................................................... 5-34
___________________________________________________________________________________
viii
List of Tables
Introduction to UNIVERGE SV8100
SECTION 1
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
UNIVERGE SV8100 is an NEC IP system that offers TDM capability, at a
competitive price. UNIVERGE SV8100 keeps a majority of the existing
Electra Elite IPK II features with a few newly added features as well.
UNIVERGE SV8100 is easy to install and provides remote maintenance
capability. A new line up of modular telephones include snap on color
panels for a customized look, large LCDs, a large color touch panel LCD,
IP capability, an information protection button, just to name a few of the
new design concepts.
The 9.5" Gateway or Base chassis provides 48 total ports (32 digital
terminals) and can include any combination of stations and trunks below
this number.
Chapter
1
The new compact 19” chassis provides 104 total ports (80 digital
terminals) and can be expanded, using three additional 19” chassis, for a
total of 416 ports (368 digital terminals). Through IP connection and four
additional 19” chassis, the system can be expanded to a maximum of 512
station ports.
The 9.5” Base and Expansion (Combined) chassis provides 104 total ports
(80 digital terminals) and can be expanded, using three additional
combined chassis, for a maximum of 416 ports (368 digital terminals).
Through IP connection and four additional combined chassis, the system
can be expanded to a maximum of 512 ports for SV8100.
The interface boards are redesigned. The boards are smaller and are
front loaded in the UNIVERGE SV8100 chassis. The boards come with
two screw pins that easily screw into the chassis. The connectors face the
front of the chassis for easy access. The connector wires run through the
front of the chassis, providing easier installation.
Migration from an IPK/IPK II system is as simple as inserting a conversion
card into the old system and connecting it to the SV8100 with a cable. The
features of the SV8100 are ready to use. Migrating to the SV8100
protects your initial investment by providing a simple, economic way of
adding more up-to-date features that help you become more agile and
improve customer satisfaction.
General Description Manual
1-1
Issue 10.0
SECTION 2
UNIVERGE SV8100
UNIVERGE SV8100 SYSTEM CAPACITIES
The UNIVERGE SV8100 CHS2U GW-US is a 9.5” chassis that has three universal
slots and one PSU. The standalone module provides 48 total ports (32 digital
terminals) and can include any combination of stations and trunks below this number.
Refer to Figure 1-1 UNIVERGE SV8100 CHS2U GW-US 9.5” Chassis on page 1-2.
Figure 1-1 UNIVERGE SV8100 CHS2U GW-US 9.5” Chassis
The UNIVERGE SV8100 CHS2U-US chassis is a compact 19” module that has six
slots and one PSU. One chassis supports a maximum of 80 station ports/40 analog
trunks. The system can be expanded to 320 station ports/184 trunks by adding three
chassis (a total of four chassis). By using IP connection a maximum of 512 station
ports/200 trunks are provided by adding an additional four 19” chassis. Refer to
Figure 1-2 UNIVERGE SV8100 CHS2U-US 19” Chassis Expandability.
Figure 1-2 UNIVERGE SV8100 CHS2U-US 19” Chassis Expandability
1-2
Introduction to UNIVERGE SV8100
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
The UNIVERGE SV8100 9.5" Base chassis provides up to 16 trunk ports or 32
extension ports. An Expansion Chassis can be installed to the right of the Controlling
or Base Chassis providing an additional 48 ports (40 trunk/ 80 stations maximum) and
can include any combination of stations and trunks below this number. With a
maximum of four Base and four Expansion chassis the system will provide up to 184
trunks and 320 extensions. With IP connections, a maximum of 200 trunk ports
(maximum of 32/64/128 talk paths supported depending on IPLA blade installed) and
512 station ports is possible. Refer to Figure 1-3 UNIVERGE SV8100 CHS2U B-US
and CHS2U E Chassis Expandability.
9.5” (Base)
9.5” (Base +
Expansion) x 1
9.5” (Base +
Expansion) x 2
9.5” (Base +
Expansion) x 4
IP Expansion
Figure 1-3 UNIVERGE SV8100 CHS2U B-US and CHS2U E Chassis Expandability
General Description Manual
1-3
Issue 10.0
SECTION 3
UNIVERGE SV8100
SV8100 DIGITAL AND IP MULTILINE TELEPHONE LINE UP
3.1
Modular Design
The UNIVERGE SV8100 offers a new exciting line up of modular telephones.
This modular design allows the telephones to be upgraded and customized.
Optional LCD panels, dial pads, handset cradles, face plates and colored side
panels can easily be snapped on and off to upgrade and customize as the
customer desires.
The easy-to-use adjustable footplate allows the customer to chose from a
variety of height positions that are right for them and their environment.
Only the DT300/DT700, Dterm Series i telephones, single line telephones,
cordless telephones and wireless telephones discussed in the document can
be installed on the SV8100 system.
To avoid damage to equipment, do not install the Dterm70 on
the SV8100 system. The Dterm70 (DTU/DTP) terminal uses
-24V and has no protection from the -48V power supply used
by the SV8100 system.
Several easy-to-read LCD displays are available, including a new large color
touch panel LCD.
Figure 1-4 UNIVERGE SV8100 Telephone Modular Design
1-4
Introduction to UNIVERGE SV8100
UNIVERGE SV8100
3.2
Issue 10.0
Digital and IP Telephones
The UNIVERGE SV8100 system offers a variety of digital and IP multiline
telephones that are compatible with the system. All telephone models are
offered in both black and white.
3.2.1
Digital Telephones
The digital telephones offer two terminal types in its line up: Value
and Economy.

Economy Telephones – the
economy telephones are
offered in a 2-button
non-display, a 6-button with
display and a 12-button with
display model. The LCD is 2-Button Non-Display
a full dot black and white
display with cursor keys.
The 10-key dial pad is
backlit for easy viewing.
The 12-button, 6-button and
6-Button with Display
2-button telephones are not
upgradeable.

Value Telephones – the
value telephones are
offered in a 12-button,
24-button and 32-button
display model as well as a
DESI-less model. The LCD
is a full dot black and white
display with cursor keys.
The 10-key dial pad is
backlit for easy viewing.
The 12-button and
24-button are upgradeable
to the 32 button or 8LD
(DesiLess). Refer to Table
1-2 Connectivity of Options
on page 1-10 for a list of
12-Button with Display
12-button
24-Button
32-Button
upgrade options.
DESI-less
General Description Manual
1-5
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
3.2.2
IP Telephones
The IP telephones offer three terminal types in its line up: Economy,
Value, and Sophisticated.

Economy Telephones – the
economy telephones are
offered in a 2-button
non-display, a 6-button with
display and a 8-button with
display model. The LCD is
2-Button Non-Display
a full dot black and white
display with cursor keys.
The 10-key dial pad is
backlit for easy viewing.
6-Button with Display
XML open interface and 10/
100 ethernet connectivity is
supported. The 6-button
and 2-button telephones are
not upgradeable.
8-Button with Display

IP Value Telephones – the
value telephones are offered in
12-button, 24-button and
32-button display models as
well as a DESI-less model.
The LCD is a full dot black and
white display with cursor keys.
The 10-key dial pad is backlit
for easy viewing. The
12-button and 24-button are
upgradeable to the 32 button
or 8LD (DesiLess). Menu/
softkey operation is provided
on the LCD. XML open
interface and 10/100 ethernet
connectivity are also provided
with. Refer to Table 1-2
Connectivity of Options on
page 1-10 for a list of upgrade
options.
12-button
24-Button
32-Button
DESI-less
1-6
Introduction to UNIVERGE SV8100
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0

General Description Manual
IP Sophisticated Telephones – the
feature that sets this telephone
apart as the flagship model is the
large color touch panel LCD. The
10-key dial pad is backlit for easy
viewing. The telephone supports
full-duplex handsfree operation and
PSTN (Public Switched Telephone
Network) adapter for analog
operation. XML open interface and
10/100 ethernet connectivity are
also provided with this telephone.
An important feature of this IP
telephone is the Information
Protection Button. Options include
a 60-button DDS console, Analog
Recording Adapter (ARA). Refer to
Table 1-2 Connectivity of Options
on page 1-10 for a list of upgrade
options.
Sophisticated
1-7
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
3.2.3
Terminal Category Reference
Table 1-1 Terminal Category Reference Chart (DT300/DT700)
provides a quick reference of the DT300/DT700 terminals.
Table 1-1 Terminal Category Reference Chart (DT300/DT700)
Series Name
DT 300
Series
DT 310
(Economy)
Digital
Terminal
(TDM)
Equipment
ID
System
Compatibility
SV8100
Comments
DTL-2E-( )
 Economical terminal providing access to basic
DTL-6DE-( )
 Fully functional keypad providing standard business
DTL-12E-( )
telephony and messaging service





DT 330
(Value)
1-8
DTL-8LD-( )
functions such as hold, transfer, speaker, microphone
and other features
2-button terminal is non-display
6-button terminal equipped with LCD and full-featured
keypad
12-button terminal is non-display
Available in black
DTL-12D-( )
 8-button DESI-Less LCD telephone
 Also available are 12-, 24-, 32-button LCD telephones
 Provides access to more sophisticated system
DTL-24D-( )
 All DT 330s come with a standard LCD display, full
features and allowing room for growth
DTL-32-D-( )

DTL-12BT( )

 Bluetooth available in black
DTL-12PA( )

 Power Save Adapter provides backup for analog
duplex speakerphone capability, module support for
expansion and feature add-on capability
 Optional 60-button DSS Console provides 60
programmable keys and provides users a Busy Lamp
Field (BLF) and 1-button access to extensions,
trunks, and system features
 Available in black and white
trunk connection
Introduction to UNIVERGE SV8100
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Table 1-1 Terminal Category Reference Chart (DT300/DT700) (Continued)
Series Name
DT 700
Series
DT 710
(Economy)
IP Terminals
Equipment
ID
System
Compatibility
SV8100
Comments
ITL-2-( )
 Economical terminal providing access to basic
ITL-6D-( )
 Fully functional keypad providing standard business
telephony and messaging service
ITL-8LDE-( )






DT 730
(Value)
ITL-8LD-( )
ITL-12D-( )
 8-button DESI-Less LCD telephone
 Also available are 12-, 24-, 32-button LCD telephones
 Provides access to more sophisticated system
ITL-24D-( )
 All DT 730s come with a standard backlit LCD display,
ITL-32-D-( )
ITL-12PA( )
DT 750
features allowing room for growth


ITL-320C-( )

Cordless
General Description Manual
full duplex speakerphone capability, module support
for expansion and feature add-on capability
 Available in black and white
 Expands the capability by providing XML display to
provide more productivity enhanced applications to
the users
 Optional 60-button DSS Console provides 60
programmable keys and provides users a Busy Lamp
Field (BLF) and 1-button access to extensions,
trunks, and system features
 Power Save Adapter provides backup for analog
trunk connection
 IP terminal provides a 5” color touch panel
 Features of the telephone provide easy use of NEC
(Sophisticated)
Wireless Handset
functions such as hold, transfer, speaker, microphone
and other features
2-button terminal is non-display
6-button terminal equipped with LCD and full-featured
keypad
8-button terminal equipped with LCD and full-featured
keypad
Available in black
IP formatted terminal has a dual port, supports
compression, full-duplex handsfree operation
Unified communications and third-party telephony
XML applications
 Access to 32 telephony feature lines across an IP
backbone, built-in full duplex speakerphone and
DESI-Less line key labeling are standard
 Optional 60-button DSS Console provides 60
programmable keys and provides users a Busy Lamp
Field (BLF) and one-button access to extensions,
trunks, and system features
C124

SIP DECT
G955

SIP DECT
DTH-4R-1

Cordless II Lite
DTL-8R-1

Cordless DECT
1-9
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
3.2.4
Upgradeable Telephone Options
The following charts provide a quick overview of the upgrade options
available with the UNIVERGE SV8100 telephones.
Table 1-2 Connectivity of Options
IP Terminals
Terminal Options
ITL-320C-1

12LK Kit
8LK Unit
Ten Key Kit
Key Kit
Value
ITL-8LD-1
ITL-12D-1
ITL-24D-1
ITL-32D-1
Digital Terminals
Economy
Digital
Economy
ITL-2E-1
ITL-6DE-1
ITL-8LDE-1
DTL-2E-1
DTL-6DE-1
DTL-12E-1




N/A (Built in)

N/A

N/A


N/A

N/A
Sophisticated
(Except
8LD-1 Unit)
Common
Value
DTL-8LD-1
DTL-12D-1
DTL-24D-1
DTL-32D-1
(Except
8LD-1 Unit)
ADA:
Analog Recording Adapter


N/A

N/A
PSA:
PSTN Adapter for analog


N/A

N/A
DSS:
60-Button DSS Console


N/A
Connect to Digital Port
on KTS
APR:
Analog Port adapter with
Ringer

N/A
DESI-Less LK/LCD Unit

N/A
(Except
8LD-1 Unit)

Backlit LCD
N/A
(Except
8LD-1 Unit)
IP
1 - 10
DESI-Less LK/LCD Unit
N/A (Built in)

N/A
N/A
Introduction to UNIVERGE SV8100
UNIVERGE SV8100
3.3
Issue 10.0
Equipment and Applications Overview
The primary target of the UNIVERGE SV8100 system is the small to
medium-sized business. As such, it supports a number of robust applications
and additional equipment that add value to the system. These include:

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Voice Mail

Computer Telephone Integration (CTI)

Unified Messaging

Wireless Handsets

Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Single Line Telephones

External Speakerphones

Doorphones

External Speakers

Wireless DECT SIP

CO/PBX lines, Centrex lines, Direct Inward Dialing (DID), Tie lines, FT1
lines, ISDN-BRI and ISDN-PRI line
Communications between legacy stations/trunks and DT700 series
telephones/IP networks are made using a VoIP daughter board, which
converts packet-based voice data to TDM-based voice data, and vice versa.
Both peer-to-peer connections and TDM-based connections are controlled by
the CPU blade. The CPU incorporates a built-in Device Registration Server
(DRS) and a single interface point of IP connection to IP telephone, PCPro
and OAI / ACD servers. Figure 1-5 Simplified SV8100 System (9.5” Gateway
and Base) Connectivity, Figure 1-6 Simplified SV8100 System (19”)
Connectivity on page 1-12 and Figure 1-7 Simplified SV8100 System (9.5”
Base and Expansion) Connectivity on page 1-13 are simplified views of the
SV8100 system connectivity.
General Description Manual
1 - 11
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Figure 1-5 Simplified SV8100 System (9.5” Gateway and Base) Connectivity
Figure 1-6 Simplified SV8100 System (19”) Connectivity
1 - 12
Introduction to UNIVERGE SV8100
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Figure 1-7 Simplified SV8100 System (9.5” Base and Expansion) Connectivity
General Description Manual
1 - 13
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
1 - 14
Introduction to UNIVERGE SV8100
Features
OVERVIEW
SECTION 1
This chapter provides a feature comparison list, which compares the IPK II
and UNIVERGE SV8100 feature names.
The remainder of the chapter provides a list of all UNIVERGE SV8100
features and a brief description. For a more detailed description of the
feature, refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 Features and Specifications
Manual.
IPK II TO UNIVERGE SV8100 FEATURE COMPARISON
LIST
SECTION 2
Chapter
2
Table 2-1 Feature Comparison List provides a cross-reference between
the Electra Elite IPK II and the UNIVERGE SV8100 features.
Table 2-1 Feature Comparison List
IPK II Feature Name
UNIVERGE SV8100 Feature Name
Account Code – Forced/Verified/Unverified
Account Code – Forced/Verified/Unverified
Account Code Entry
Account Code Entry
Alarm
Alarm
Alarm Reports
Alarm Reports
Alphanumeric Display
Alphanumeric Display
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
Ancillary Device Connection
Ancillary Device Connection
Answer Hold
Answer Hold
Answer Key
Answer Key
Attendant Call Queuing
Attendant Call Queuing
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Automatic Release
Automatic Release
General Description Manual
2-1
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-1 Feature Comparison List (Continued)
IPK II Feature Name
2-2
UNIVERGE SV8100 Feature Name
Automatic Route Selection
Automatic Route Selection
Background Music
Background Music
Barge-In
Barge-In
Battery Backup – System Memory
Battery Backup – System Memory
Battery Backup – System Power
Battery Backup – System Power
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
Call Duration Timer
Call Duration Timer
Call Forwarding – Centrex
Call Forwarding – Centrex
Call Forwarding – Park and Page
Voice Response System (VRS) – Call
Forwarding – Park and Page
Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding with Follow Me
Call Forwarding with Follow Me
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override
Call Monitoring
Call Monitoring
Call Redirect
Call Redirect
Call Waiting/Camp-On
Call Waiting/Camp-On
Callback
Callback
Caller ID Call Return
Caller ID Call Return
Caller ID
Caller ID
Not Supported
Caller ID – Flexible Ringing
Central Office Calls, Answering
Central Office Calls, Answering
Central Office Calls, Placing
Central Office Calls, Placing
Class of Service
Class of Service
Clock/Calendar Display
Clock/Calendar Display
CO Message Waiting Indication
CO Message Waiting Indication
Code Restriction
Code Restriction
Code Restriction Override
Code Restriction Override
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Table 2-1 Feature Comparison List (Continued)
IPK II Feature Name
UNIVERGE SV8100 Feature Name
Code Restriction, Dial Block
Code Restriction, Dial Block
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
Applications
TAPI Compatibility
Conference
Conference
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release
Continued Dialing
Continued Dialing
Not Supported
Cordless DECT Terminals
Cordless Telephone Connection
Cordless Telephone Connection
Data Line Security
Data Line Security
Delayed Ringing
Delayed Ringing
Department Calling
Department Calling
Department Step Calling
Department Step Calling
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone
Dial Tone Detection
Dial Tone Detection
Dialing Number Preview
Dialing Number Preview
Digital Trunk Clocking
Digital Trunk Clocking
Digital Voice Mail
VM8000 InMail
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Directed Call Pickup
Directed Call Pickup
Directory Dialing
Directory Dialing
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb
Door Box
Door Box
Drop Key
Drop Key
Dterm Cordless II Terminal
Dterm Cordless II Terminal
Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal
Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal
General Description Manual
2-3
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-1 Feature Comparison List (Continued)
IPK II Feature Name
2-4
UNIVERGE SV8100 Feature Name
Not Supported
DTPlusWare
Dterm Handset Cordless
SV8100/SV8300 Terminals
Dterm IP Gateway System
Not Supported
Not Supported
Ecology
E911 Compatibility
E911 Compatibility
Electra Elite IPK Terminals
Electra Elite IPK Terminals
Electra Elite Terminal Migration
IPK/IPK II Migration
EliteApps – Interactive Voice Response
SMB8000 Interactive Voice Response
Elite CallAnalyst
SMB8000 Communications Analyst
Facsimile CO Branch Connection
Facsimile CO Branch Connection
Flash
Flash
Flexible System Numbering
Flexible System Numbering
Flexible Timeouts
Flexible Timeouts
Forced Trunk Disconnect
Forced Trunk Disconnect
Not Supported
General Purpose Relay
Group Call Pickup
Group Call Pickup
Group Listen
Group Listen
Handset Mute
Handset Mute
Handsfree and Monitor
Handsfree and Monitor
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom
Ringing
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom
Ringing
Headset Operation
Headset Operation
Hold
Hold
Hot Key-Pad
Hot Key-Pad
Hotel/Motel
Hotel/Motel
Hotline
Hotline
Howler Tone Service
Howler Tone Service
Intercom
Intercom
Internal Hub
SV8100 PoE Gigabit Switch
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Table 2-1 Feature Comparison List (Continued)
IPK II Feature Name
UNIVERGE SV8100 Feature Name
IP Extenders/Mobile ConneX
Not Supported
IP Station (MEGACO) – IAD Integrated Access
Device
IP Multiline Station (SIP)
IP Station (MEGACO) – MG 16
IP Multiline Station (SIP)
Not Supported
IP Multiline Station (SIP) – ML440 Cordless
IP Station (SIP) – MG16
IP Single Line Telephone (SIP)
IP Trunk – (SIP) Session Initiation Protocol
IP Trunk – (SIP) Session Initiation Protocol
IP Trunk – H.323 Protocol
IP Trunk – H.323
IP Trunk (SIP) – MG16
IP Trunk – (SIP) Session Initiation Protocol
IPK II – PC Assistant
SV8100 UC Desktop Suite Applications
IPK II – PC Attendant
SV8100 UC Desktop Suite Applications
IPK II In-Mail
VM8000 InMail
IPK II VoIP Management System
Not Supported
ISDN Compatibility
ISDN Compatibility
Not Supported
K-CCIS – IP
K-CCIS - IP with IAD
Not Supported
K-CCIS - IP with PVA
K-CCIS – IP with PVA
K-CCIS - T1
K-CCIS – T1
Last Number Redial
Last Number Redial
Licensing
Licensing
Line Preference
Line Preference
Long Conversation Cutoff
Long Conversation Cutoff
Not Supported
Loop Keys
Not Supported
Maintenance
Meet Me Conference
Meet Me Conference
Meet Me Paging
Meet Me Paging
Meet Me Paging Transfer
Meet Me Paging Transfer
Memo Dial
Memo Dial
Message Waiting
Message Waiting
General Description Manual
2-5
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-1 Feature Comparison List (Continued)
IPK II Feature Name
2-6
UNIVERGE SV8100 Feature Name
Not Supported
MH240 Wireless IP Telephone
Microphone Cutoff
Microphone Cutoff
Not Supported
Mobile Extension
Multiline Conference Bridge
SMB8000 Conference Bridge
Multimedia Conference Bridge
SMB8000 Conference Bridge
Multiple Trunk Types
Multiple Trunk Types
Music on Hold
Music on Hold
Name Storing
Name Storing
Night Service
Night Service
Off-Hook Signaling
Off-Hook Signaling
One-Digit Dial Option
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
One-Touch Calling
One-Touch Calling
Operator
Operator
(OPX) Off-Premise Extension
(OPX) Off-Premise Extension
Paging, External
Paging, External
Not Supported
Paging, External (VRS)
Paging, Internal
Paging, Internal
Park
Park
PBX Compatibility
PBX Compatibility
PC Programming
PC Programming
Power Failure Transfer
Power Failure Transfer
Prime Line Selection
Prime Line Selection
Private Line
Private Line
Programmable Function Keys
Programmable Function Keys
Programming from a Multiline Terminal
Programming from a Multiline Terminal
Pulse to Tone Conversion
Pulse to Tone Conversion
Quick Transfer to Voice Mail
VM8000 InMail
Redial Key
Redial Function
Remote (System) Upgrade
Remote (System) Upgrade
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Table 2-1 Feature Comparison List (Continued)
IPK II Feature Name
UNIVERGE SV8100 Feature Name
Repeat Redial
Repeat Redial
Resident System Program
Resident System Program
Reverse Voice Over
Reverse Voice Over
Ring Groups
Ring Groups
Ringdown Extension, Internal/External
Ringdown Extension, Internal/External
Room Monitor
Room Monitor
Save Number Dialed
Save Number Dialed
Secondary Incoming Extension
Secondary Incoming Extension
Secretary Call (Buzzer)
Secretary Call (Buzzer)
Secretary Call Pickup
Secretary Call Pickup
Not Supported
Security
Selectable Display Messaging
Selectable Display Messaging
Selectable Ring Tones
Selectable Ring Tones
Serial Call
Serial Call
Single Line Telephones, Analog 500/2500 Sets
Single Line Telephones, Analog 500/2500 Sets
SLT Adapter
SLT Adapter
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
Softkeys
Softkeys
Speed Dial – System/Group/Station
Speed Dial – System/Group/Station
Not Supported
Speed Dial – Telephone Book
Station Add-On Console
SV8100/SV8300 Terminals
Station Hunt
Station Hunt
Station Message Detail Recording
Station Message Detail Recording
Station Name Assignment-User Programmable
Station Name Assignment – User
Programmable
Station Relocation
Station Relocation
Not Supported
SV8100 Internal Router
Not Supported
SV8100 NetLink
Synchronous Ringing
Synchronous Ringing
General Description Manual
2-7
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 2-1 Feature Comparison List (Continued)
IPK II Feature Name
2-8
UNIVERGE SV8100 Feature Name
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
Tandem Ringing
Tandem Ringing
Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference)
Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference)
TAPI Compatibility
TAPI Compatibility
Tone Override
Tone Override
Traffic Reports
Traffic Reports
Transfer
Transfer
Trunk Group Routing
Trunk Group Routing
Trunk Groups
Trunk Groups
Trunk Queuing/Camp-On
Trunk Queuing/Camp-On
Not Supported
UCB (Unified Communications for Business)
Unified Messaging
UM8000 Mail
Not Supported
uMobility
Not Supported
Unicast/Multicast Paging Mode
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Uniform Numbering Network
Uniform Numbering Network
Universal Slots
Universal Slots
User Programming Ability
User Programming Ability
Virtual Extensions
Virtual Extensions
Not Supported
VM8000 InMail Park and Page
Not Supported
Voice Response System (VRS) Embedded VRS
Not Supported
VM8000 InMail Upload Download Audio
Not Supported
VM8000 InMail – Automatic Access to VM by
Caller ID
Not Supported
VM8000 InMail – Cascade Message Notification
Not Supported
VM8000 InMail – Email Notification
Not Supported
VM8000 InMail – Find-Me Follow-Me
Not Supported
VM8000 InMail – Language Setting
Not Supported
Voice Call Recording
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Table 2-1 Feature Comparison List (Continued)
IPK II Feature Name
SECTION 3
UNIVERGE SV8100 Feature Name
Voice Mail Integration (Analog)
Voice Mail Integration (Analog)
Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys
Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys
Voice Over
Voice Over
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
Not Supported
Voice Response System (VRS)
Voice Response System (VRS)
Not Supported
Voice Response System (VRS) Embedded VRS
Not Supported
Voice Response System (VRS) Upload
Download Audio
Volume Controls
Volume Controls
Warning Tone For Long Conversation
Warning Tone for Long Conversation
Wireless – DECT
Wireless DECT (SIP)
FEATURES DESCRIPTIONS
Account Code – Forced/Verified/Unverified
Account Codes are user-dialed codes that help the system administrator categorize
and/or restrict trunk calls. The system has two types of Forced Account Codes:

Forced Account Codes (Unverified)

Verified Account Codes
Account Code Entry
Account Codes are user-dialed codes that help the system administrator categorize
and/or restrict trunk calls. Optional Account Codes allow a user to enter an Account
Code while placing a trunk call or anytime while on a call. The system does not
require the user to enter the optional account code.
Alarm
Alarm lets any station extension work like an Alarm clock. An extension user can
have an Alarm remind them of a meeting or an appointment. There are two types of
Alarms:

Alarm 1 (sounds only once at the preset time)

Alarm 2 (sounds every day at the preset time)
General Description Manual
2-9
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Alarm Reports
Enhancements
When attempting a call requiring an IP to TDM conversion and no DSP resource is
available, the system displays a message on the multiline terminal and can
generate an alarm via the Alarm Report (system software Version 3000 or higher
required).
With Version 5000 or higher CPU software, the Alarm Reports feature has been
enhanced to include an alarm for IP duplication. With Version 4000 or lower CPU
software, the SV8100 had no alarm function for an IP address duplication. With
this enhancement, the SV8100 is able to detect another device on the same
subnet having an IP address that conflicts with those assigned to the CPU, IPLA,
and DSP resources to make troubleshooting easy when IP packets are not sent.
With Version 7000 or higher software, the SV8100 can be configured to send an
email notification of a system event that causes a reset and DIMLast and
DIMDump files to be created. The system can also be configured to email the
DIMLast and DIMDump text files by using the SMTP email settings in the 47-18-xx
programs and mounting a PZ-ME50-US to the CCPU. This enhancement requires
the V7000 Enhancement License (0036) and Maintenance License (0043).
The UNIVERGE SV8100 system logs various errors and reports information about
the operation that can be used to determine the cause of a problem. The system can
indicate several errors on the multiline telephone display, output to a USB stick on the
CD-CP00-US, or be downloaded in PCPro. The report data can also be sent via
email.
Alphanumeric Display
Multibutton display telephones have a 3-line, 24 character per line alphanumeric
display that provides various feature status messages. These messages help the
display telephone user process calls, identify callers and customize features.
The contrast is not adjustable when the telephone has background music enabled.
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
The Analog Communications Interface (ACI) feature uses a PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Door
Phone/Paging) adapter to provide two analog ports (with associated relays) for Music
on Hold, External Paging, Door Boxes and auxiliary devices such as tape recorders
and loud bells. The system allows up to 48 PGD(2)-U10 ADPs (when used for ACI
ports) for a maximum of 96 analog ports. Each PGD(2)-U10 ADP requires an unused
port on a CD-8DLCA/CD-16DLCA blade.
2 - 10
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Ancillary Device Connection
Ancillary Device Connection allows installation of selected peripheral (ancillary)
devices to a multiline terminal. This feature enhances peripheral device objectives.
An UNIVERGE SV8100 multiline terminal user can accomplish this by using the
AP(R)-R/APR-L Unit (Analog Port Adapter with Ringer) or AP(A)-R Unit (Analog Port
Adapter without Ringer) for analog telephone devices, or installing the AD(A)-R/
APA-L Unit to connect devices such as tape recorders.
The AP(A)-R/AP(R)-R/APA-L Units are the interface for installing a single line
telephone, Modem, credit card reader, wireless headset, NEC Conference Max
Conferencing unit or other compatible analog device.
The PSA-L Unit (Power Save Adapter), an optional adapter for the ITL/DTL
Terminals, is used to make or receive a call using the Public Switched Telephone
Network (PSTN) when a call cannot be made with the ITL/DLT extension.
Answer Hold
Answer Hold allows a multiline terminal user to press the flashing Answer key to
answer an incoming ringing call or a Camp-on call. When the multiline terminal user is
already answering a call, the first call is automatically placed on hold, depending on
the user setting in Program 15-02-06.
Answer Key
Multiline terminals have an Answer Key with an LED that flashes when the multiline
terminal user receives an incoming CO/PBX, Tie/DID transfer, or CO/PBX transfer
call. When multiple calls are received, the Answer Key is used to pick up calls and
continues flashing until the last unanswered call is answered. Press the Answer Key
during a call to hold the current call and allow the next call to be answered.
Attendant Call Queuing
Attendant extensions can have up to 32 incoming calls queued before additional
callers hear a busy tone. This helps minimize call congestion in systems that use the
attendant as the overflow destination for unanswered calls. For example, you can
program Direct Inward Lines and Voice Mail calls to route to the attendant when their
primary destination is busy. With Attendant Call Queuing, these unanswered calls
would normally “stack up” for the attendant until they can be processed.
The 32 call queue total includes Intercom, DISA, DID, DIL, tie line and transferred
calls. If the attendant does not have an appearance for the queued call, it waits in line
to be answered. If the attendant has more than 32 calls queued, an extension can
transfer a call to the attendant only if they have Busy Transfer enabled.
Attendant Call Queuing is a permanent, non-programmable system feature.
General Description Manual
2 - 11
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) uniformly distributes calls among agents of a
programmed ACD Group. When a call rings into an ACD Group, the system
automatically routes the call to the agent that has been idle the longest. Automatic
Call Distribution (ACD) is much more sophisticated and comprehensive than
Department Calling and other group services – it can accurately judge the work load
at each agent and distribute calls accordingly. The system allows up to 64 ACD
Groups and 512 ACD agents.
You can put any agent in any group. An agent can be in more than one group only
when using AICs. This allows, for example, a Technical Service representative to
answer customer service calls at lunch time when many of the Customer Service
representatives are unavailable.
The ACD Master Number is the extension number of the whole group. Calls directly
ringing or transferred to the ACD Master number enter the group and are routed
accordingly. Although the master number can be any valid extension number, you
should choose a number that is out of the normal extension range.
Automatic Release
Automatic Release drops the line circuit when an outside party abandons the call. For
this feature to work with Loop Start Trunks, the CO/PBX providing the outside line
must provide a timed disconnect signal. Automatic Release is normally provided on
Ground Start, DID, ISDN, and Tie Line trunks.
Automatic Route Selection
Enhancements
With Version 7000 or higher software:

The Dial Analysis table has expanded from 400 to 800 tables (V7000 Enhancement
License (0036) required).

The SV8100 can recognize each system where the DT700 extension(s) are
connected and provide an Automatic Route Selection COS based on the System
(System ID) when using NetLink.
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) provides call routing and call restriction based on
the digits a user dials. ARS gives the system the most cost-effective use of the
connected long distance carriers.
ARS is an on-line call routing program that you can customize (like other system
options) from a display telephone. ARS accommodates 400 call routing choices –
without a custom-ordered rate structure database. With ARS, you can modify the
system routing choices quickly and easily. This is often necessary in the
telecommunications world of today where the cost structure and service choices
frequently change.
2 - 12
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
The ARS feature can add or delete digits and route calls according to predetermined
levels. When UNIVERGE SV8100 systems are networked together by Tie lines or
K-CCIS, the networked systems can be called by a system number and a user
extension number, just an extension number, or by using a trunk access code.
Recognize Extension Location when Logging in with NetLink
With Version 7000 or higher software, the SV8100 can recognize each system
where the DT700 extension(s) are connected then provide an Automatic Route
Selection COS based on the System (System ID) when using NetLink.
Background Music
Background Music (BGM) sends music from a customer-provided music source to the
speaker of the multiline telephone when the station is idle.
Barge-In
Barge-In permits an extension user to break into another extension user’s established
call, including Conference calls. This sets up a Conference-type conversation
between the intruding extension and the parties on the initial call. With Barge-In, an
extension user can get a message through to a busy co-worker right away.
There are two Barge-In modes: Monitor Mode (Silent Monitor) and Speech Mode.
With Monitor Mode, the caller Barging In can listen to another user conversation but
cannot participate. With Speech Mode, the caller Barging In can listen and join
another user conversation.
The use of monitoring, recording, or listening devices to eavesdrop,
monitor, retrieve, or record telephone conversation or other sound
activities, whether or not contemporaneous with transmission, may
be illegal in certain circumstances under federal or state laws.
Legal advice should be sought prior to implementing any practice
that monitors or records any telephone conversation. Some federal
and state laws require some form of notification to all parties to a
telephone conversation, such as using a beep tone or other
notification methods or requiring the consent of all parties to the
telephone conversation, prior to monitoring or recording the
telephone conversation. Some of these laws incorporate strict
penalties.
Battery Backup – System Memory
The battery on the CD-CP00-US retains the Clock/Calendar and Last Number Redial
(LNR) buffers for each station when the CD-CP00-US encounters a power loss. With
a fully charged battery, the settings are retained for approximately three years.
General Description Manual
2 - 13
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
The system programmed memory (Customer Database) is stored in Nonvolatile
Memory and can be erased only by performing a First Initialization.

For additional storage time, the database and Caller ID History can be copied to the Compact
Flash card on the CD-CP00-US.
Battery Backup – System Power
A built-in battery provides complete system operating power for approximately 30
minutes during commercial power outages. When optional (locally provided) batteries
are connected and fully charged, full system operation can be maintained for an
extended time. Actual time depends on system configuration, traffic conditions, and
the battery capacity.
Call Appearance (CAP) Keys
This feature automatically places an outside call on a Call Appearance key when the
system is operated as a hybrid (Multifunction) system. These keys can be assigned
on any multiline terminal or the same key can appear on multiple terminals. This
feature allows efficient call handling when numerous CO calls are received and a
limited number of CO line key appearances are available.
Once a Call Appearance (CAP) Key call is set up, the user can handle it like any other
trunk call. For example, the user can place the call on hold, transfer it to a co-worker
or send it to a park orbit. An incoming call is answered on the first available CAP key,
beginning with the lowest numbered key. If keys 1~3 are Call Appearance (CAP)
Keys, for example, the first incoming call is answered on key 1. If key 1 is busy, the
next call is answered on key 2. If keys 1 and 2 are busy, the next call is answered on
key 3. If all three keys are busy, additional incoming calls queue for the first available
key.
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys
Enhancements
With Version 3000 or higher system software, the appropriate line key page
automatically displays for incoming calls on the DTL-8LD-1 (DESI-Less) and
ITL-320C-1 terminals.
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys are software extensions available on the Basic and Expanded
Port Packages. A Call Arrival Extension assigned to a line key, can appear and ring
on an individual station or multiple stations. Call Arrival (CAR) Keys are busy only
when in the ringing state and are not used during the talking state.
Call Arrival (CAR) Keys are shared with the Virtual Extensions (VE). In virtual
extension mode, the key acts as a secondary extension. Up to 256 CAR/VE keys are
provided.
2 - 14
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Call Duration Timer
Call Duration Timer lets a multiline terminal with an LCD time their trunk calls on the
telephone display. This helps users that must keep track of their time on the
telephone. For incoming trunk calls, the Call Time begins as soon as the user
answers the call.
Call Forwarding – Centrex
The Call Forwarding – Centrex feature allows a station user to forward an incoming
PBX/Centrex CO call to an outside location using the same PBX/Centrex CO line to
free the line for additional use.
Call Forwarding – Centrex supports the following:

Call Forwarding – Immediate

Call Forwarding – Busy

Call Forwarding – No Answer

Call Forwarding – Busy/No Answer
Call Forwarding
Enhancements
With Version 3000 or higher system software, the Desktop terminal and the
Mobile Extension can both ring. If neither extension answers, the call is forwarded
to Voice Mail.
Call Forwarding permits an extension user to redirect their calls to another extension
or an off-premise number. Call Forwarding ensures that the user calls are covered
when a user is away from their work area.
The types of Call Forwarding are:

Call Forwarding when Busy or Unanswered
Calls to the extension forward when busy or unanswered.

Call Forwarding – Centrex
When using PBX/Centrex trunks, calls to the extension perform a Centrex
transfer using Immediate, Busy, and No Answer Forwarding.

Call Forwarding Immediate
All calls forward immediately to the destination, and only the destination rings.

Call Forwarding with both Ringing
All calls forward immediately to the destination, and both the destination and the
forwarded extension ring (not for Voice Mail).
General Description Manual
2 - 15
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100

Call Forwarding when Unanswered
Calls forward only if they are unanswered (Ring No Answer).

Call Forwarding Follow Me
Refer to Call Forwarding with Follow Me on page 2-16 for more information.

Live Monitor
Allows the extension to emulate an answering machine. Refer to VM8000 InMail
System Guide for more information.
Call Forwarding reroutes calls ringing an extension, including calls transferred from
another extension. Call Forwarding can also be split, allowing internal and external
calls to forward to different destinations. The extension user can enable Call
Forwarding from their telephone. An extension user can also set the forwarding for
another extension by using Call Forward for any Extension to Destination. To redirect
calls while a user is at another telephone, use Call Forwarding with Follow Me. A
periodic VRS announcement can remind users that their calls are forwarded.
Call Forwarding with Follow Me
While at a co-worker’s desk, a user can have Call Forwarding with Follow Me redirect
their calls to the co-worker’s extension. This helps an employee who gets detained at
a co-worker’s desk longer than expected. To prevent losing important calls, the
employee can activate Call Forwarding with Follow Me from the co-worker’s
telephone.
Call Forwarding with Follow Me reroutes calls from the destination extension. To
reroute calls from the initiating (forwarding) extension, use Call Forwarding.
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
Off-Premise Call Forwarding allows an extension user to forward their calls to an
off-site location. By enabling Call Forwarding, Off-Premise, the user can stay in touch
by having the system forward their calls while they are away from the office. The
forwarding destination can be any telephone number the user enters, such as a
mobile phone, home office, hotel or meeting room. Off-Premise Call Forwarding can
route the off-site telephone number over a specific trunk or through a trunk group,
Automatic Route Selection or Trunk Group Routing.
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override
An extension user can override Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb at another
extension. This is helpful, for example, to dispatchers and office managers that
always need to get through.
2 - 16
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Call Monitoring
Call Monitoring allows selected multiline terminal users to monitor another user’s
conversation without participating. A programmable audible alert tone can be sent to
that station user. Without the audible alert (silent monitor), no indication is provided to
either the monitored station or the outside party.
The use of monitoring, recording, or listening devices to eavesdrop,
monitor, retrieve, or record telephone conversation or other sound
activities, whether or not contemporaneous with transmission, may
be illegal in certain circumstances under federal or state laws.
Legal advice should be sought prior to implementing any practice
that monitors or records any telephone conversation. Some federal
and state laws require some form of notification to all parties to a
telephone conversation, such as using a beep tone or other
notification methods or requiring the consent of all parties to the
telephone conversation, prior to monitoring or recording the
telephone conversation. Some of these laws incorporate strict
penalties.
Call Redirect
Call Redirect allows a multiline terminal user to transfer a call to a predefined
destination (such as an operator, Voice Mail, or another extension) without answering
the call. This can be useful if you are on a call and another rings in to your extension.
When you press the Call Redirect key, the call is transferred, allowing you to continue
with your current call.
This feature works with the following calls:

Normal trunk call

DID

DISA

DIL

E&M

ICM
The following calls cannot be redirected with this feature:

ACD

Transferred

Department Group (all ring mode)

Door Box

Virtual Extension
General Description Manual
2 - 17
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Call Waiting/Camp-On
With Call Waiting, an extension user may call a busy extension and wait in line
(Camp-On) without hanging up. When the user Camps-On, the system signals the
busy extension with two beeps indicating the waiting call. The call goes through when
the busy extension becomes free. Call Waiting helps busy extension users know
when they have additional waiting calls. It also lets callers wait in queue for a busy
extension without being forgotten.
Callback
When an extension user calls a co-worker that does not answer or is busy, they can
leave a Callback request for a return call. The user does not have to repeatedly call
the unanswered extension back, hoping to find it idle.
Caller ID Call Return
The Caller ID Call Return feature allows the voice mail system to use Caller ID
information captured with the message to call and connect the person that left the
message with the voice mail user that is checking messages.
Caller ID
Enhancements
Pressing the Left Cursor Key twice (on equipped terminals) displays the Incoming
Call History (Version 3000 or higher software).
With Version 4000 (4.01 or higher) software, calls to a busy extension or busy
tones returned to the caller are logged in the Caller ID List. When a busy call is
logged, the Caller ID List key flashes the same as it does with a new missed call.
Memo Display Function
With Version 4000 or lower software, the SV8100 can display matching Caller ID
but is limited to 12 characters. With Version 5000 or higher software, it can
display up to 28 Characters per line and up to three lines of information for a total
of 84 characters (Maximum 28 digits x 3 lines). If needed, the system can be set to
use any one of three available display lines. Additionally, the original CID
information can be seen while on the call by pressing the right cursor button on the
phone. The Memo Display Function requires Version 5000 or higher software
and the Version 5000 Enhancement license.
Caller ID allows a display terminal to show an incoming caller’s telephone number
(called the Directory Number or DN) and optional name. The Caller ID information is
available as pre-answer display. With the pre-answer display, the user previews the
caller’s number before picking up the ringing line.

2 - 18
On the CD-CP00-US for Caller ID (also used for DTMF receivers and Call Progress Tone
Detection) 32 resources are available. The PZ-BS10 provides an additional 64 resources.
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Memo Display Function
With Version 4000 or lower software, the SV8100 can display matching Caller
ID but is limited to 12 characters. With Version 5000 or higher software, it can
now display up to 28 Characters per line and up to three lines of information for
a total of 84 characters (Maximum 28 digits x 3 lines). If needed, the system can
be set to use any one of three available display lines. Additionally, the original
CID information can be seen while on the call by pressing the right cursor button
on the phone.
Caller ID – Flexible Ringing
Enhancements
Flexible Ringing by Caller ID feature added with Version 3000 or higher software.
The Caller ID – Flexible Ringing feature provides several different options for
rerouting calls based on the Caller ID received.
Central Office Calls, Answering
Enhancements
With Version 3000 or higher system software, the appropriate line key page
automatically displays for incoming calls on the DTL-8LD-1 (DESI-Less) and
ITL-320C-1 terminals.
With Version 7000 or higher software, the Side Tone Auto Setup feature has
been added.
The system provides flexible routing of incoming CO (trunks) calls to meet the exact
site requirements. This lets trunk calls ring and be answered at any combination of
system extensions. A maximum of 200 trunks are available.
Central Office Calls, Placing
Enhancements
With Version 7000 or higher software, the Side Tone Auto Setup feature has been
added.
General Description Manual
2 - 19
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
The system provides flexibility in the way each extension user can place outgoing
trunk calls. This lets you customize the call placing options to meet site requirements
and individual needs. To place a call, a user can:

Press Line Keys

Press a Trunk Group Key

Press a Trunk Group Routing (dial 9) Key

Dial a code for a specific trunk (#9 + the trunk number)

Dial a code for a Trunk Group (704 + group number)

Dial a code for Trunk Group Routing or ARS (9)

Dial an Alternate Trunk Route Access Code (which you must define)

Press or Use a Speed Dial bin
There are 200 available trunks.
Class of Service
Class of Service (COS) sets various features and dialing options (called items) for
extensions. The system allows any number of extensions to share the same Class of
Service. An extension can have a different Class of Service for each Night Service
mode. This lets you program a different set of dialing options for daytime operation,
nighttime operation and even during lunch breaks. An extension Class of Service can
be changed in system programming or via a Service Code (normally 677). There are
15 available Classes of Service.
Clock/Calendar Display
The system uses Clock/Calendar Display for:

Central Office Calls (Access Maps)

Station Message Detail Recording

Class of Service (Class)

System Reports

Direct Inward Lines

Toll Restriction (Class)

Display Telephones

Trunk Group Routing

Night Service (Automatic)

Voice Mail

Programmable Trunk Parameters

Voice Response System

Ring Groups
Using the Daylight Savings Setup program, you can determine whether the system
should automatically adjust the system time for daylight savings time/standard time
changes.
2 - 20
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Clock Adjustment
The system can be programmed to automatically adjust the system clock nightly.
This feature allows you to make adjustments should the system cabinet regularly lose
or gain time.
CO Message Waiting Indication
This feature provides a Message Waiting indication when Voice Mail from the Central
Office is used. The CO provides this feature using Visual Message Waiting Indication
(VMWI) standards. Visual Message Waiting Indication visually indicates to a user that
a message is present in their voice mail box. When VMWI is provided, the
UNIVERGE SV8100 provides a flashing LED on a line key assigned with the trunk
appearance.
The VMWI standard supported by the UNIVERGE SV8100 includes:

Type 1 Caller ID, FSK without power ringing using the MDMF protocol

Type 1 Caller ID, FSK without power ringing using the SDMF protocol
Code Restriction
Code Restriction limits the numbers an extension user may dial. By allowing
extensions to place only certain types of calls, you can better control long distance
costs. The system applies Code Restriction according to the Code Restriction Class.
The system allows for up to 15 Code Restriction Classes and 416 extensions.
Code Restriction Override
Code Restriction Override lets a user temporarily bypass the Code Restriction for an
extension. This helps a user that must place an important call that Code Restriction
normally prevents. For example, you could set up Code Restriction to block 900 calls
and then provide a Code Restriction Override code to your attendant and executives.
When the attendant or executive needs to place a 900 call, they just:

Press Speaker, dial a service code and enter their override code.

Press Speaker, and dial a trunk access code (e.g., 9 or #9 002).

Place the 900 call without restriction.
You can assign a different Code Restriction Override code to each extension. Or,
extensions can share the same override code.
This feature overrides all Code Restriction programming. Walking Code Restriction
allows you to assign a Code Restriction level for each user. When a call is placed
using Walking Code Restriction, the restriction for the call is based on the Code
Restriction level defined in Programs 21-05-xx and 21-06-xx.
General Description Manual
2 - 21
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Code Restriction, Dial Block
Code Restriction, Dial Block lets a user temporarily block dialing on an extension.
This lets a user block their telephone from being used by another person while they
are away from their desk. A user must enter a 4-digit personal code to enable/disable
this feature.
Dial Block can also be set by using the supervisor access code. If Dial Block is set by
an extension user, the supervisor cannot release it. If Dial Block is set using the
supervisor code, the extension user cannot release it.
Important: This function works by password and Class of Service control (the
supervisor is not an assigned extension). If Dial Block is available for all Classes of
Service, everyone may become a supervisor if they know the Dial Block password.
Conference
Conference lets an extension user add additional inside and outside callers to their
conversation. With Conference, a user may set up a multiple-party telephone meeting
without leaving the office. The CD-CP00-US provides 64 Conference ports, allowing
any number of internal or external parties to be conferenced together up to a limit of
32 parties. This means that one extension can conference up to 31 internal and/or
external parties together (the originator would be the 32nd party reaching the
maximum of 32). While this Conference call is active, another user can initiate a
separate Conference also for a limit of 32 parties, or any number of conferences can
be initiated with a number of parties (up to 32) until all 64 Conference ports are busy.

64 conference ports are available with a PZ-ME50-US mounted on the CD-CP00-US and a
second cabinet installed. Without the second cabinet and PZ-ME50-US installed, the
CD-CP00-US provides a maximum of 32 conference ports.
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release
Voice Call Conference lets an extension user in the same work area join in a trunk
Conference. To initiate a Voice Call Conference, an extension user presses the
Meet-Me Conference key and tells their co-workers to join the call. The system
releases the privacy on the trunk, and other users can press the trunk line key to join
the call. Line keys assigned for the trunk blink to indicate that privacy is released, and
others can join the current call.
Voice Call Conference does not use the telephone system features to announce the
call. The person initiating the Voice Call Conference announces it verbally. A tone,
indicating others have joined the conference, can be provided.
The CD-CPOO-US provides 64 conference circuits to allow internal or external
parties to be conferenced together up to a limit of 32.
2 - 22
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Privacy Mode Toggle Option
The Privacy Mode Toggle option allows an extension user to quickly change an
outside call from non-private to private mode. If the outside call is on a line key, the
user presses the line key to switch from non-private mode to private mode. For
systems using the Privacy Mode Toggle option, trunks initially have the privacy
released. The remainder of the call is private. If the call is on a Call Appearance
(CAP) Key, the user presses their Meet-Me Conference function key instead. Unlike
pressing the line key, pressing the Meet-Me Conference key toggles back and forth
between private and non-private mode for the call.
Continued Dialing
Continued Dialing allows an extension user to dial a call, wait for the called party to
answer and then dial additional digits. This helps users that need services like Voice
Mail, automatic banking and Other Common Carriers (OCCs).
There are two types of Continued Dialing:
Continued Dialing for Intercom Calls
Depending on the Class of Service for an extension, a multiline terminal user may be
able to dial additional digits after their Intercom call connects. In systems with Voice
Mail, for example, Continued Dialing lets extension users dial the different options
after the Voice Mail answers. Without Continued Dialing, extension users cannot
access these Voice Mail options.
Continued Dialing for Trunk Calls
Continued Dialing gives a user access to outside services like automatic banking, an
outside Automated Attendant, bulletin boards and Other Common Carriers (OCCs).
After the outside service answers, the user can dial digits for whatever options the
services allow. Without Continued Dialing, the system Toll Restriction cuts off the call
after a specific number of dialed digits.
Continued Dialing may make the system more susceptible to toll
fraud.
Cordless DECT Terminals
Enhancements
With Version 4000 or higher software, a Flash (Recall) key can be placed on a
line key.
With Version 4000 or higher software, the door strike relay can be activated from
the MH240 or Cordless DECT terminal by a Flash Key assigned to a line key in
Program 15-07 (751: 62).
General Description Manual
2 - 23
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
The Cordless DECT Terminals may be used with the UNIVERGE SV8100 system.
The DTL-8R-1 TEL uses 1.9 GHz DECT 6.0 FM Technology and is connected in
tandem to a multiline terminal. The ITL-8R-1 TEL uses 1.9 GHz DECT 6.0 FM
Technology and is connected using the local network to the SV8100 as a stand alone
terminal.
Press the applicable key on the Base Unit to Switch between Cordless operation and
multiline terminal operation.
Cordless Telephone Connection
Using an AP(R)-R/AP(A)-R Unit for DTH/DTR telephones or an APR-L for DTL
telephones a cordless telephone (2500-type) can be connected to a multiline terminal.
The CD-4LCA, PZ-4LCA, CD-8LCA, PZ-8LCE and the SLTII(1)-U( ) ADP also support
cordless telephones, but this feature refers to multiline terminal cordless connection.
Data Line Security
Data Line Security protects any station port from receiving audible tones (such as
Camp-On or Override) and denies a station from barging in while busy to prevent
disruption of data transmission when using a modem or facsimile machine.
Delayed Ringing
Delayed Ringing allows programmed secondary answering positions to ring on
incoming calls after a programmed time. This feature applies to CO/PBX lines,
Secondary Incoming Extensions, Virtual Extensions, and Call Arrival Keys.
Department Calling
With Department Calling, an extension user can call an idle extension in a
programmed Department Group (64 Department Groups available) by dialing the
group pilot number. For example, this would let a caller dial the Sales department just
by knowing the Sales department pilot number. The caller would not have to know
any Sales department extension number.
Two types of routing are available with Department Calling: Priority Routing and
Circular Routing. With Priority Routing, an incoming call routes to the highest priority
extensions first. Lower priority extensions ring only if all higher priority extensions are
busy. With Circular Routing, each call rings a new extension.
Department Step Calling
After calling a busy Department Calling Group member, an extension user can have
Department Step Calling quickly call another member in the group. The caller does
not have to hang up and place another Intercom call if the first extension called is
unavailable. Department Step Calling also allows an extension user to cycle through
the members of a Department Group.
2 - 24
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone
For an extension with Dial Pad Confirmation Tone enabled, the user hears a beep
each time they press a key. This is helpful for Intercom calls and Dial Pulse trunk
calls, since these calls provide no Call Progress tones.
Dial Tone Detection
If a trunk has Dial Tone Detection enabled, the system monitors for dial tone from the
Telco or PBX when a user places a call on that trunk. If the user accesses the trunk
directly (by pressing a line key or dialing #9 and the trunk number), the system drops
the trunk if dial tone does not occur. If the user accesses the trunk via a Trunk Group
(by dialing a trunk group code or automatically through a feature like Last Number
Redial), the system can drop the trunk or optionally skip to the next trunk in the group.
Dialing Number Preview
Dialing Number Preview lets a display multiline terminal user dial and review a
number before the system dials it. Dialing Number Preview helps the user avoid
dialing errors.
Digital Trunk Clocking
The UNIVERGE SV8100 CD-CP00-US has a built-in clock source for all digital trunk
blades. Digital trunk blades are connected via an internal PLO (Phase Locked
Oscillator) to derive Primary Clock from the network in priority order. If priority is set
up incorrectly, or if two primary clocks are coming in, slips may occur causing
improper data synchronization. The PLO, equipped with the UNIVERGE SV8100
CD-CP00-US is the timing source for all digital trunk blades in the system. The PLO
synchronizes the system and clocks signals from another office. When the
UNIVERGE SV8100 is a clock receiver office, the PLO generates the clock signal
according to the source clock signals received from the source office in the network.
The source clock signals are extracted from digital trunk blades and are supplied to
the PLO.
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Enhancements
With Version 7000 or higher system software, more flexible schedule settings in
the DID Conversion table are provided

Direct Inward Dialing supports day of week and time of day scheduling.

The Dial-In Conversion table can support a maximum of 500 tables.

V7000 Enhancement LIcense (0036) required.
General Description Manual
2 - 25
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) lets outside callers directly dial a system extension. DID
saves time for callers who know the extension number they want to reach. To place a
DID call, the outside caller dials the local exchange (NNX) and additional digits to ring
the telephone system extension. For example, DID number 926-5400 can directly dial
extension 400. The caller does not have to rely on attendant or secretary call
screening to complete the call.

Direct Inward Dialing requires DID service from Telco.
In addition to direct dialing of system extensions, DID provides:

DID Dialed Number Translation

Flexible DID Service Compatibility

DID Intercept

DID Camp-On
There are 20 DID Translation tables that can be divided between 2000 entries.
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
A Direct Inward Line (DIL) is a trunk that rings an extension, virtual extension or
Department Group directly. Since DILs only ring one extension or group (i.e., the DIL
destination), employees always know which calls are for them. For example, a
company operator can have a Direct Inward Line for International Sales Information.
When outside callers dial the DIL telephone number, the call rings the operator on the
International Sales line key. The DIL does not ring other extensions.
There are 200 available trunks, 64 Department Groups, 512 extensions and 256
Virtual Extensions.
DIL Delayed Ringing
Extensions in a Ring Group can have delayed ringing for another extension DIL. If
the DIL is not answered at its original destination, it rings the DIL No Answer Ring
Group. This could help a Technical Service department, for example, that covers
calls for an Inside Sales department. If the Inside Sales calls are not answered, they
ring to the Technical Service department.
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Enhancements
With Version 3000 or higher system software, if an outside caller dials an invalid
extension number when connected to the VRS Automated Attendant or calling in
on a DISA trunk, the following new options are available to route these calls:
2 - 26

Extension Number (e.g., operator)

F-Route Dial (e.g., outside phone number)
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
DISA permits outside callers to directly dial system extensions, trunks and selected
features. This could help an employee away from the office that wants to directly dial
co-workers or use the company trunks for long distance calls. To use DISA, the
employee:

Dials the telephone number that rings the DISA trunk.

Waits for the DISA trunk to automatically answer with a unique dial tone.

Dials the 6-digit DISA password (access code).

Waits for a second unique dial tone.

Accesses a system trunk, uses a selected feature or dials a system extension.
DISA calls ring system extensions like other outside calls. If an extension has a line
key for the DISA trunk, the call rings that key. If the extension does not have a line
key, the extension must have a Call Appearance (CAP) key to answer the call.
You can set DISA operation differently for each Night Service mode. For example, a
trunk can be a normal trunk during the day and a DISA trunk at night. You can also set
the routing for DISA trunks when the caller dials a busy or unanswered extension,
dials incorrectly, or forgets to dial.
DISA allows 15 users, 15 DISA Classes of Service and 200 trunks.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
The DSS Console gives a multiline terminal user a Busy Lamp Field (BLF) and
one-button access to extensions, trunks and system features. This saves time for
users that do a lot of call processing (e.g., attendants, operators or dispatchers). The
DSS Console simplifies:

Calling extensions and door boxes

Placing, answering and transferring outside calls

Making an External or Internal Page

Switching the Night Service mode

Activating DSS Console Alternate Answer
The DSS Console also provides DSS Console Alternate Answer. This lets a multiline
terminal user with a DSS Console quickly reroute their calls to a co-worker.
Transferred and dial 0 calls ring both DSS Consoles and, if the VRS is installed, the
main operator hears the message, “Your calls have been forwarded”. Central office
calls ring both consoles and no message is heard by the operator.
Directed Call Pickup
Directed Call Pickup permits an extension user to intercept a call ringing another
extension. This allows a user to conveniently answer a co-worker call from their own
telephone. With Directed Call Pickup, an extension user can pick up:

Trunk calls (i.e., Ring Group calls)
General Description Manual
2 - 27
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100

Direct Inward Lines

Transferred trunk calls

Transferred Intercom calls

Ringing and voice-announced Intercom calls
Directory Dialing
Enhancements
Directory Dialing with main CPU software Version 3000 or higher provides the
following enhancements:

Pressing the Right Cursor Key twice (on equipped terminals) displays the Common/
Group Speed Dial directory.

Pressing the Right Cursor Key three times (on equipped terminals) displays the
Extension Name directory.
Directory Dialing allows a multiline terminal user to select a co-worker or outside
caller from a list of names, rather than dialing the telephone number. There are four
types of Directory Dialing:

SPD – Speed Dials

EXT – Co-worker’s Extensions

STA – Personal Speed Dials

TELBK – Telephone Book
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns provide extension users with audible
and visual call status signals. This lets users tell the type of call by listening to the
ringing/tones and watching the keys. It also helps users monitor the progress of their
calls. In addition, Distinctive Ringing lets multiline terminal users customize their
Intercom and trunk call ringing. This is helpful for users that work together closely.
For example, if several co-workers set their multiline terminals to ring at different
pitches, each co-worker can always tell which calls are for them. You can also
customize the tones the system uses for splash tone, confirmation tone, trunk ring
tone, Intercom ring tone and Alarm ring tone. Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100
Programming Manual for more details.
2 - 28
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb blocks incoming calls and Paging announcements. DND permits an
extension user to work by the telephone undisturbed by incoming calls and
announcements. The user can activate DND while their telephone is idle or while on
a call. Once activated, incoming trunk calls still flash the line keys. The user may use
the telephone in the normal manner for placing and processing calls.
Five Do Not Disturb options are available at each extension. These options can be
accessed via multiline terminal Softkeys, DND feature key or DND system access
code.

1 = Incoming trunk calls blocked

2 = Paging, incoming Intercom, Call Forwards and transferred trunk calls
blocked

3 = All calls blocked

4 = Incoming Call Forwards blocked

0 = Do Not Disturb canceled
Door Box
The Door Box is a self-contained Intercom unit typically used to monitor an entrance
door. A visitor at the door can press the Door Box call button (like a door bell). The
Door Box then sends chime tones to all extensions programmed to receive chimes.
To answer the chime, the called extension user lifts the handset. This lets the
extension user talk to the visitor at the Door Box. The Door Box is convenient to have
at a delivery entrance, for example. It is not necessary to have company personnel
monitor the delivery entrance; they answer the Door Box chimes instead. Any number
of system extensions can receive Door Box chime tones.
Each Door Box has a pair of normally open relay contacts that can connect to an
electric door strike. Use these contacts to remotely control the entrance door. After
answering the Door Box chimes, a multiline terminal user can press Recall to activate
the Door Box contacts. This in turn releases the electric strike on the entrance door.
The device connected to the Door Box contacts cannot exceed the contact ratings
shown in the following table:
Door Box Specifications
Contact Configuration
Maximum Load
Maximum Initial Contact Resistance
Normally Open
60mA @ 30 VDC
10mA @ 90 VDC
50m Ohms
The system can have up to eight Door Boxes. Six chime tones are available.
General Description Manual
2 - 29
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Drop Key
The Drop Key abandons a call while retaining the PBX/Centrex line to originate
another call. The Drop Key is provided by programming a Function Key. This feature
allows Recall to be used to provide a hookflash to the PBX or Central Office. A single
line telephone user can use the Drop Key function with an access code.
Dterm Cordless II Terminal
The NEC Dterm Cordless II Terminal may be used with the UNIVERGE SV8100
system. The DTR-4R-1 TEL uses 900 MHz Digital Spread Spectrum (DSS)
Technology and must be connected in tandem to a multiline terminal.

The Dterm Cordless II Terminal cannot be used as standalone.
Press the applicable key on the Base Unit to Switch between Cordless operation and
multiline terminal operation.
Dterm Cordless II (DTR-4R-1)
Feature
Digital Technology
900 MHz Spread Spectrum
LCD
2-line, 16-digit LCD Display
Silent Alarm
Dedicated Keys
Yes
TALK, TRANSFER, HOLD, CONF, CHAN, REDIAL, MUTE, R/VOL
Programmable Line Keys
4
50~350 feet
Operational Range
 Icon
Message Waiting Indication
Headset Connection
Yes
Channels
10
 Determined by environmental conditions
Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal
The NEC Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal may be used with the UNIVERGE SV8100
system. The DTH-4R-1 TEL uses 900 MHz FM with ADPCM (digital) Technology and
is connected in tandem to a multiline terminal.
Press the applicable key on the Base Unit to Switch between Cordless operation and
multiline terminal operation.
Feature
Digital Technology
LCD
Silent Alarm
2 - 30
Dterm Cordless Lite II
(DTH-4R-1)
900 MHz FM with ADPCM (digital)
2-line, 16-digit LCD Display
Yes
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Dterm Cordless Lite II
(DTH-4R-1)
Feature
Dedicated Keys
TALK, TRANSFER, HOLD, CONF, CHAN, REDIAL, MUTE, R/VOL
Programmable Line Keys
Operational Range 
Message Waiting Indication
4
50~150 feet
Yes (Icon)
Headset Connection
Yes
Channels
30
 Determined by environmental conditions. These are cordless RF devices and, therefore, some
interference may take place when operating in the same environment as other wireless devices which
operate in the same frequency spectrum.
DTPlusWare
DTPlusWare is a server based XML application that allows NEC IP display phones
(DT710/730/750) access to the following features and options:

View list of received, missed and outgoing calls.

Send and receive Instant Messages to other DTPlusWare client phones.

For the DT750 phone:

Store and display photos.

Store a photo to be used as a screen saver.

View Calendar one month at a time.

Set Presence status for other DTPlusWare client phones to see (requires
SV8100 TAPI license).

View list of contacts set in DTPlusWare and on Corporate Active Directory if
available.

View current weather for any US city.

Receive bulletins broadcast from DTPlusWare server.

Display World Clock for predefined cities.

When system is equipped with the SMB8000 Multimedia Conference Bridge you
can create, view and change conferences from a client IP desk phone and
iPhone.

Change DTPlusWare client login password.

For iPhone users DTPlusWare is available via a local Wi-Fi connection with the
following features:

Uses same login credentials as desk phone.

Set Presence status.

View list of contacts set in DTPlusWare and on Corporate Active Directory.
General Description Manual
2 - 31
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100

Receive bulletins broadcast from DTPlusWare server.

View list of received, missed and outgoing calls.

Send Instant Messages to other DTPlusWare client phones.

Call the office desk phone.

Change DTPlusWare login password.
Ecology
Enhancements
This feature added with Version 7000.
Environmental issues, such as global warming or ecology are one of the most
important themes in today's world. The following energy saving features are
implemented in this system:

Ecology Mode

Power Saving Mode
E911 Compatibility
Enhancements
With Version 4000 or higher system software, the 911 Cut Through feature works
when dialing trunk Access+911.
With Version 4000 or higher system software, the Calling Party Number (CPN)
sent out has been enhanced.
IMPORTANT - PLEASE NOTE THE FOLLOWING!
2 - 32
1.
When ARS is NOT enabled and the system allows trunk access by dialing 9,
single line telephones disregard Program 20-03-03 – System Options for Single Lines
Telephones – SLT DTMF Dial to Trunk Lines. This prevents the system from
connecting to a trunk until all the digits are dialed. This can be avoided by using either
8 or 9x (but not 91) as the trunk access code. Be aware that this change requires
additional programming changes.
2.
Do not use an asterisk within a PBX access code if the Account Code feature is
used. With the Account Code feature enabled, if  is used in the access code, the
trunk stops sending digits to the central office after the  is sent.
3.
Finally, but most importantly, TEST - TEST - TEST!! Due to the nature of the E911
feature, it is imperative that when programming this, or any other feature, to be aware
of the consequences. Make sure to test the extensions with the E911 feature to
confirm that other features do not prevent the call from being completed. When using
external equipment, make sure the dial treatment tables are working properly.
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
E911 Compatibility ensures that emergency calls always get through. If an emergency
occurs, a user goes to any telephone, lifts the handset and dials 911. The system
built-in E911 compatibility places the emergency call even if the user forgets to dial an
access code or press a line key. The E911 abilities include:

Attendant Notification

Emergency Routing

Calling Party Identification
Electra Elite IPK Terminals
The Electra Elite IPK terminals provide ergonomic form and user-friendly functions.
With advanced digital circuitry, the IPK terminals consists of distinct models to meet
diverse user telephone terminal needs.
The UNIVERGE SV8100 system allows a maximum of 240 Electra Elite IPK terminals
to be attached to the system.
Facsimile CO Branch Connection
The UNIVERGE SV8100 system provides branch connection of locally provided
facsimile machines to CO/PBX lines. Additional dedicated CO/PBX lines are not
required for a facsimile to operate. The facsimile shares any CO/PBX line on the COI
Package and Power Failure (PF) circuit.
Flash
Enhancements
With Version 4000 or higher software, a Flash (Recall) key can be placed on a
line key.
With Version 4000 or higher software, the door strike relay can be activated from
the MH240 or Cordless DECT terminal by a Flash Key assigned to a line key in
Program 15-07 (751: 62).
Flash allows an extension user to access certain CO and PBX features by interrupting
the trunk loop current. Flash lets an extension user take full advantage of whatever
features the connected Telco or PBX offers. You must set the Flash parameters for
compatibility with the connected Telco or PBX.
General Description Manual
2 - 33
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Flexible System Numbering
Flexible System Numbering lets you reassign the system port-to-extension
assignments. This allows an employee to retain their extension number if they move
to a different office. In addition, factory technicians can make comprehensive changes
to your system number plan. You can have factory technicians:

Set the number of digits in internal (Intercom) functions. For example, extension
numbers can have up to eight digits.

Change your system Service Code numbers.

Assign single digit access to selected Service Codes.
Talk to your sales representative to find out if this program is available to you.
You can also use Flexible System Numbering to change the system Trunk Group
Routing code. Although the default code of 9 is suitable for most applications, you
can alter the code if needed.
Flexible Timeouts
The Flexible Timeouts feature provides a variety of timers in the Resident System
Program to allow the system to operate without initial programming. The system
timers can be changed to meet customer needs according to the system application
requirements.
Forced Trunk Disconnect
Forced Trunk Disconnect allows an extension user to disconnect (release) another
extension active outside call. The user can then place a call on the released trunk.
Forced Trunk Disconnect lets a user access a busy trunk in an emergency, when no
other trunks are available. Maintenance technicians can also use Forced Trunk
Disconnect to release a trunk on which there is no conversation. This can happen if a
trunk does not properly disconnect when the outside party hangs up.
Forced Trunk Disconnect abruptly terminates the active call on the
line. Only use this feature in an emergency and when no other line
is available.
General Purpose Relay
The system allows up to eight general purpose relays using PGD(2)-U10 ADP’s (four
relays per PGD unit) and one general purpose relay built into the CD-CP00-US for a
maximum of nine relays. These relays are normally opened and can be closed by
dialing an access code on any terminal or pressing a pre programmed function key on
any multiline terminal.
2 - 34
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
The relays can then be set back to an open state by dialing an access code on any
terminal or by pressing a pre programmed function key on any multiline terminal. A
relay can also be set back to an open state after a drive timer expires. Each relay can
have a separate drive timer, when the relay is in a closed state, and this timer expires,
the relay is automatically placed back into an open state.
Group Call Pickup
Group Call Pickup allows an extension user to answer a call ringing another extension
in a Pickup Group. This permits co-workers in the same work area to easily answer
others calls. The user can dial a code or press a programmed Group Call Pickup key
to intercept the ringing call. If several extensions in the group are ringing at the same
time, Group Call Pickup intercepts the call based on the extension priority in the
Pickup Group.
With Group Call Pickup, a user can intercept the following calls:

A call ringing the user’s own pickup group

A call ringing another pickup group when the user knows the group number

A call ringing another pickup group when the user does not know the group
number
There are 64 Call Pickup Groups available.
Group Listen
Group Listen permits a multiline terminal user to talk on the handset and have their
voice broadcast over the telephone speaker. This lets the multiline terminal user’s
co-workers listen to the conversation. Group Listen turns off the multiline terminal
handsfree microphone so the caller does not pick the co-worker’s voices during a
Group Listen.
Handset Mute
Handset Mute is provided to most terminals connected to the UNIVERGE SV8100
system. While talking on the multiline terminal handset, a station user can dial a
feature code or press Mic to mute the transmit speech path. The station user can still
hear the outside (or intercom) voice.
Handsfree and Monitor
Handsfree allows a multiline terminal user to process calls using the speaker and
microphone in the telephone instead of the handset. Handsfree is a convenience for
workers who do not have a free hand to pick up the handset. For example, a terminal
operator could continue to enter data with both hands while talking on the telephone.
General Description Manual
2 - 35
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Three variations of Handsfree are available.

Handsfree
The user can press Speaker to place and answer calls instead of using the
handset.

Automatic Handsfree
The user can press a trunk line key or virtual extension key without lifting the
handset or pressing Speaker. An extension can have Automatic Handsfree for
only outgoing calls or both outgoing and incoming calls.

Monitor
User can place a call without lifting the handset, but must lift the handset to
speak.
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
Handsfree Answerback permits an extension user to respond to a voice-announced
Intercom call by speaking toward the telephone, without lifting the handset. Like
Handsfree, this is a convenience for workers who do not have a free hand to pick up
the handset.
Headset Operation
A multiline terminal user can use a customer-provided headset in place of the
handset. Like using Handsfree, using the headset frees up hands for other work.
Headset Operation also provides privacy not available from Handsfree.
As the headset plugs into a separate jack on the bottom of the telephone, the handset
can still be connected to the telephone. This provides an option to use the handset,
headset or the speakerphone for calls.
Hold
Hold lets an extension user put a call in a temporary wait state. The caller on Hold
hears silence or Music on Hold, not conversation in the extension user work area.
While the call waits on Hold, the extension user may process calls or use a system
feature. Calls left on Hold too long recall the extension that placed them on Hold.
There are four types of Hold:

System Hold
An outside call a user places on Hold flashes the line key (if programmed) at all
other multiline terminals. Any multiline terminal user with the flashing line key
can pick up the call.
2 - 36
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100

Issue 10.0
Exclusive Hold
When a user places a call on Exclusive Hold, only that user can pick up the call
from Hold. The trunk appears busy to all other multiline terminals that have a
key for the trunk. Exclusive hold is important if a user does not want a
co-worker picking up their call on Hold.

Group Hold
If a user places a call on Group Hold, another user in the Department Group can
dial a code to pick up the call. This lets members of a department easily pick up
others calls.

Intercom Hold
A user can place an Intercom call on Hold. The Intercom call on Hold does not
indicate at any other extension.
Hot Key-Pad
The Hot Key-Pad feature allows the user to place a call without lifting the handset or
pressing Speaker. When the user dials another extension number on an idle
telephone with Hot Key-Pad enabled, Speaker lights and the internal call is made.
When the user dials the trunk access code from a telephone with Hot Key-Pad
enabled, Speaker lights, a trunk is seized and the outgoing call is made.
Hotel/Motel
Enhancements
PVA PMS replaces the PMS-U10 for the application blade for PMS integration to
SV8100. This new blade provides the following features:

Programming is supported using HTML interface.

PVA PMS supports NEAX-90K, NEAX-60K, KTSi and KTSi w/ENQ protocols.

The PVA PMS IP address is assigned in system programming, similar to other
blades, and the CPU IP address is populated automatically.

The Mask feature allows the masking of the following PMS messages if not
supported by the PMS application:

Checkin

Checkout

Edit Room

Wakeup Call

Message Waiting Set/Cancel

DND Set/Cancel

Room Status

Room Restriction
General Description Manual
2 - 37
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Enhancements (Continued)
With Version 7000 or higher software, the following features were added:

View current room status in Web Pro and Phone Pro.

The ability to change from any room status to any other room status.

Automatically set room status on check out to any valid room status option.
Your UNIVERGE SV8100 telephone system provides Hotel/Motel services in addition
to the many features available to business users. These Hotel/Motel services help
you run your facility more efficiently, save you time and money, and provide your
guests with more responsive service.
Hotel/Motel features include:

Wake Up Call

Single Digit Dialing

A Department Calling Group

Message Waiting

PMS Integration

PMS Configurator Software

Room to Room Calling Restriction

Toll Restriction (When Checked In)

Room Status

Room Status Printouts

DSS Console Monitoring

Do Not Disturb

Flexible Numbering Plan
Hotline
Hotline gives a multiline terminal user one-button calling and Transfer to another
extension (the Hotline partner). Hotline helps co-workers that work closely together.
The Hotline partners can call or Transfer calls to each other by pressing a single key.
The Hotline feature has two applications.
2 - 38

Hotline (Hotline partner)

Ringdown Extension, Internal/External (Refer to Ringdown Extension, Internal/
External on page 2-67.)
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
In addition, the Hotline key shows the status of the partner extension.
When the key is . . .
The extension is . . .
Off
Idle
On
Busy or ringing
Fast Flash
DND – All calls (option 3) or Intercom calls (option 2)
Double Wink On
ACD Agent logged on the group
Wink Off
ACD Agent logged off
There are 512 internal Hotline extensions available.
Howler Tone Service
Howler Tone Service provides a Howler Tone when a station remains off-hook after a
call is completed or when a station is off-hook and digits are not dialed in a
programmed time.
Intercom
Enhancements
With Version 7000 or higher software, a special ringtone is provided when a
pre-assigned extension places an Intercom call.
Intercom gives extension users access to other extensions. This provides the system
with complete internal calling ability.
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
Handsfree Answerback permits an extension user to respond to a voice-announced
Intercom call by speaking toward the telephone, without lifting the handset. Like
Handsfree, this is a convenience for workers who do not have a free hand to pick up
the handset.
Busy Status Display
When a display multiline terminal user places an Intercom call to a busy extension,
the details of the busy status (who is talking to the extension or which line is in use by
the extension) can be displayed. The details of the trunk busy status (the extension
using the line) can be displayed after trying to access the trunk. This feature provides
a user information which can determine whether or not they should use Barge-In for
the extension or trunk. This information automatically displays for a multiline terminal
when programmed.
General Description Manual
2 - 39
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
IP Multiline Station (SIP)
Enhancements
The same user name and password can be assigned to IP Multiline Station,
MH240 and Desktop ports when automatic or manual registration is used (Version
3000 or higher software).
With Version 3000 or higher system software, the Registration Override feature is
enhanced to allow IP Multiline Stations (SIP) using 1st Party CTI application or
Multiline Stations (SIP) in a system using 3rd Party CTI applications (Desktop
Shared Services or UCB) to be overridden giving users access to their IP
telephone from any location. By utilizing the override login function, users have the
flexibility of logging into their IP Station in the office as well as remotely at the home
office.
NAPT (Network Address Port Translation) - With Version 3000 ~ Version 5000
system software, DT700 series terminals can be installed at remote locations,
however Plug and Play is not supported. Some configuration in the remote router
is required, and terminal firmware must be upgraded to Version 3.0.0.0 or
higher.

Continue below for additional NAPT enhancements.
When upgrading to Version 3100 or higher software, four IP Terminal Basic
licenses are provided. If a system with Version 3000 (3.01 or lower) is upgraded
to Version 3100 software, the system gains four IP Terminal licenses as soon as it
is upgraded.
With Version 5.0.0.0 firmware, the following features are supported.

Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP): Standard used to transmit and receive
information about neighboring network devices using Layer 2 Multicast
frames.

XML Multi-Window Support – the multi-window service adds the following:

Multiple XML applications can be displayed and accessed through the NEC
terminal XML menu.

Line key operation can be performed without closing the active XML application
window.
Refer to the DT700 Resource manual for detailed information.
For troubleshooting purposes, a managed switch capable of port mirroring is
required to capture packet data from the SV8100 IPLB Ethernet port.
With Version 6000 or higher the NAPT feature is enhanced. The remote side
router may not require having port forwarding set up. However, due to the fact that
many manufacturers are producing routers, port forwarding may still be needed.
The Version 3000 Enhancement license is required for this feature and Program
15-05-45 must be enabled on a per station basis. This feature requires installation
of a PZ-( )IPLB.
2 - 40
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
The UNIVERGE SV8100 system supports IP extensions using a variety of multiline
terminals. These telephones have the same look and functionality of typical multiline
telephones, but they are connected to the CCPU via IP rather than by a hardwired
connection to a DLC port.
The following DT700 IP Multiline Telephones (ITL) support IP extensions:

ITL-2E-1 (BK) TEL

ITL-6DE-1 (BK) TEL

ITL-8LDE-1 (BK) TEL

ITL-8LD-1 (BK) TEL/ITL-8LD-1 (WH) TEL

ITL-12D-1 (BK) TEL/ITL-12D-1 (WH) TEL

ITL-12PA-1 (BK) TEL

ITL-24D-1 (BK) TEL/ITL-24D-1 (WH) TEL

ITL-32D-1 (BK) TEL/ITL-32D-1 (WH) TEL

ITL-32OC-1 (BK) TEL
NAPT Traversal
NAPT (Network Address Port Translation), is a method by which a private
address or addresses and their TCP/UDP ports are translated into a single
public address and its TCP/UDP ports. The NAPT feature gives the SV8100 the
ability to “traverse” its own subnet. With NAPT, the network administrator can
place the CD-CP00-US and the IPLA/IPLB (VoIPDB) in the customers LAN
while still making it accessible to users outside the local LAN. The NAPT
Feature also allows the IP terminals to be placed in a local LAN in a remote
network and be able to communicate back to the SV8100.
With Version 3000 ~ Version 5000 software, Port forwarding statements are
required in the router that the SV8100 resides behind as well as the router that
the IP terminal/terminals resides behind. A PZ-( )IPLA or PZ-( )IPLB can be
used for NAPT transversal.
With Version 6000 or higher software, improvements have been made to the
NAPT feature. The router that the SV8100 resides behind still requires Port
Forwarding statements. However the router that the IP terminal/terminals
reside behind may not require any port forwarding. This feature is only available
when using a PZ-( )IPLB (IPLA does not support this feature). Due to the fact
that there are many manufacturers producing routers there may still be times
when port forwarding is required.
IP Multiline Station (SIP) – ML440 Cordless
Many SMB businesses, understanding the impact of a mobile workforce, are rapidly
defining their requirements for enabling effective communications and information
access for mobile users. SMB Mobility will allow the individual staff member to be
instantly accessible- thus becoming more productive.
General Description Manual
2 - 41
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
The ML440 IP Wireless Handset is an ergonomically designed compact wireless
handset for business users who are mobile in the office and want to make and receive
wireless calls while in the office. The DECT protocol operates in the 1.9 GHZ
frequency band that has been cleared specifically for voice applications, thus avoiding
any interference problems and delivering crystal clear and secure voice
conversations.
The ML440 provides numerous features and conveniences for optimal comfort. Its
illuminated graphic color LCD display enables use in poorly lit environments, while its
internal loudspeaker provides Handsfree operation with excellent sound quality.
Powerful encryption techniques ensure secure communication, and it can also
provide the subscriber with most of the features available for a wired phone, in
addition to its roaming and handover capabilities.
IP Single Line Telephone (SIP)
Enhancements
With Version 4000 software, FoIP (Fax over Internet Protocol) with T.38 is
supported.
The SV8100 Version 4000 Enhancement license is required for T.38 to function.
With Version 4000 (4.01 or higher) software video codecs H.264, H.263 and
H.261 are supported.
The SV8100 Version 4000 Enhancement license is required for video support.
For Standard SIP video support, one SV8100 SIP video license is required per
system.
With SV8100 Version 5000 (5.00 or higher) software and PZ-IPLB daughter
board installed, half duplex connections are not supported. For troubleshooting
purposes, a managed switch capable of port mirroring is required to capture packet
data from the SV8100 IPLB Ethernet port.
With Version 6000 (6.00 or higher), the SV8100 now supports both Attended and
Unattended transfers. In previous versions, the SV8100 only supported Attended
transfer.
SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) is used for Voice over Internet Protocol. It is defined
by the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force) RFC3261. Other RFC designations,
such as RFC3842, refer to a later implementation of SIP and may be supported by the
UNIVERGE SV8100. Commonly called SIP Station, this feature is used for IP
Stations using SIP.
SIP analyzes requests from clients and retrieves responses from servers, then sets
call parameters at either end of the communication, handles call transfer, and
terminates. Typically, such features, including but not limited to Voice over IP
services, are available from an SIP service provider.
2 - 42
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
STD SIP Transfer–Unattended
With Version 6000 or higher software, any standard SIP terminal can perform
an Unattended (Blind/Unsupervised) transfer.
IP Trunk – (SIP) Session Initiation Protocol
Enhancements
With Version 4000 software, FoIP (Fax over Internet Protocol) with T.38 is
supported.
The SV8100 Version 4000 Enhancement license is required for T.38 to function.
With SV8100 Version 5000 (5.00 or higher) software and PZ-IPLB daughter
board installed, half duplex connections are not supported. For troubleshooting
purposes, a managed switch capable of port mirroring is required to capture packet
data from the SV8100 IPLB Ethernet port.
The SV8100 Version 5000 (5.00 or higher) software enhancement enables
multiple SIP trunk carriers to be utilized when NetLink is configured.
With Version 7000 or higher, when + is added to the country code of an incoming
SIP trunk call, it is recognized as an international call, simplifying outgoing calls
from the incoming call list.
The UNIVERGE SV8100 IP Trunk SIP package sends the real time voice over the
corporate LAN or WAN. The voice from the telephone is digitized and then put in
frames to be sent over a network using Internet protocol.
Using VoIP equipment at a gateway (a network point that acts as an entrance to
another network), the packetized voice transmissions from users in the company are
received and routed to other parts of the company intranet (local area or wide area
network) or they can be sent over the Internet using CO lines to another gateway.
The PZ-32IPLA/IPLB, PZ-64IPLA/IPLB or PZ-128IPLA/IPLB Daughter Board
interface can provide IP trunks and Tie Lines that can operate in the following modes:

COI

COID

DID

TLI

DTI
General Description Manual
2 - 43
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
SIP Trunk E.164 Support
With SIP Trunk E.164 Support enabled, the PBX is able to support SIP
configurations where the number presentation within the SIP messages is
formatted using the E.164 international numbering scheme. Specifically the
system is able to handle the + digit when required as the International Access
Code.
SIP Trunk E.164 CLIP Enhancement
With the SIP Trunk E.164 CLIP Enhancement enabled, when an incoming SIP
call from an external ITSP is presented at the system with a + in the From
header field as the international access code, it is recognized and displayed as
an international call at the terminal display and also logged in the terminals
incoming caller history, allowing any outbound calls made from a multiline
terminals caller history possible using this numbering scheme.
This presentation can be a requirement of certain SIP ITSPs (Internet Telephony
Service Providers) so it is necessary the PBX can handle these calls and modify
any SIP messages to the correct format accordingly.
IP Trunk – H.323
Enhancements
With SV8100 Version 5000 (5.00 or higher) software and PZ-IPLB daughter
board installed, half duplex connections are not supported. For troubleshooting
purposes, a managed switch capable of port mirroring is required to capture packet
data from the SV8100 IPLB Ethernet port.
H.323 is an International Telecommunication Union (ITU) standard for Packet Based
Multimedia Communication Systems. The UNIVERGE SV8100 can use H.323 to
connect to another UNIVERGE SV8100 system or a third-party product.
The feature set is limited. When using H.323, it is not possible to use the advanced
networking features. If these features are required, use IP KCCIS. The UNIVERGE
SV8100 Voice over IP Trunk blade H.323 package sends the real-time voice over the
corporate LAN or WAN. The voice from the telephone is digitized and then put in
frames to be sent over a network using Internet Protocol.
The UNIVERGE SV8100 Voice over IP Trunk – H.323 blade package allows
communication using standard H.323 (Normal and Fast Start) Protocol and allows
connectivity to any H.323 standards compliant voice gateway and gatekeeper. This
VoIP Trunk blade also allows Registration and Authentication Server (RAS) support to
register with an RAS Server and use Gatekeeper for dynamic call routing.
2 - 44
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
The PZ-(x)IPLA/IPLB – H.323 is an optional interface that can provide IP trunks and
Tie Lines. It can operate in the following modes:

COI

COID

DID

TLI

DTI
Depending on the requirements and resource allocation in the LAN/WAN/Internet, the
PZ-(x)IPLA/IPLB – H.323 can be configured to use any of the following voice
compressions:

G.729 Low bandwidth requirement used on most Wide Area Network links.

G.711 High bandwidth requirement – usually used on Local Area Networks.

G 722 codec is useful in fixed network, Voice over IP applications, where the
required bandwidth is typically not prohibitive.

G.723 is an ITU-T standard wide band speech codec. This is an extension of
Recommendation G.721 adaptive differential pulse code modulation to 24 and
40 kbit/s for digital circuit multiplication equipment application.
IPK/IPK II Migration
Enhancements
This feature added with Version 2500.
DTU/DTP terminal support is available with Version 2500 (2.51 or higher).
With Version 4000 (4.01 or higher) software, a combination of IPK/IPK II cabinets
and SV8100 chassis are supported.
The IPK/IPK II Migration package allows the user of an existing NEC IPK/IPK II
platform to use the enhanced abilities of the SV8100.
ISDN Compatibility
Enhancements
Calling Party Name can be sent on outgoing ISDN calls (Version 3000 or higher
software).
With Version 4000 (4.01 or higher) CPU software, 2 B-Channel Transfer is
supported.
General Description Manual
2 - 45
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
ISDN-BRI
Integrated Service Digital Network – Basic Rate Interface (ISDN-BRI) is a Public
Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) service that provides two B channels and a D
channel (2B + D) for voice call trunking. The B channels provide two voice path
connections. Caller ID is usually a standard feature on ISDN-BRI provided trunks.
Caller ID indication displays the calling party telephone number on the LCD of the
multiline terminal for CO incoming calls. This interface provides voice communication
path only.
With ISDN BRI the SV8100 only supports the following protocol:

National ISDN-1 (NI-1)
ISDN-PRI
ISDN-PRI (Integrated Service Digital Network – Primary Rate Interface) is a Public
Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) service that provides 23 B channels and a
single D channel (23B+1D) for trunking. The UNIVERGE SV8100 supports it. Caller
ID indication displays the calling party telephone number on the LCD of the multiline
terminal for CO incoming calls. This interface provides voice communication path
only.
With ISDN PRI the SV8100 supports the following protocols:

NI-2

4ESS (AT&T Custom)

AT&T 5ESS (Lucent Custom)

DMS-100 Custom (Nortel Spec NIX-A211-1)

DMS-100 National ISDN (Nortel Spec NIX-A233-1)
ISDN – BRI/PRI Features
2 - 46

DID Line Service

Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP)

Calling Party Number (CPN) Presentation from Station

Calling Party Name

SMDR Includes Dialed Number

Display Shows Why Caller ID is Not Available
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
ISDN 2 B-Channel Transfer
The ISDN PRI 2 B-Channel Transfer feature allows the UNIVERGE SV8100 to
receive a call on one B-Channel and transfer it back out on a second B-Channel
(Trunk-to-Trunk transfer on the telco side). When the transferred call connects,
both of the B-Channels are then released and available for either making or
receiving another call. This feature provides more efficient use of B Channels
on an ISDN PRI by allowing a customer to transfer calls without tying up their B
Channels for the duration of the call.
K-CCIS – IP
Enhancements
With Version 4000 (4.01 or higher) CPU software, K-CCIS – IP has been
improved to support Peer-to-Peer calls between IP Terminals residing in different
offices, without using DSP resources. With software lower than Version 4000, two
DSP resources in each office/system were consumed for calls between IP
Terminals.
With Version 5000 or higher CPU software, the SV8100 supports FAX over IP
(T.38) between SV8100 and to the SV8500 and SV8300. This feature enables the
system to change to the specified CODEC for FAX when the system detects a FAX
Tone during conversation. Consequently, the quality of FAX calls can be secured
even if the system uses a low quality CODEC on the call. This feature requires the
Version 5000 or higher software, the PZ-IPLB32/64/128 VoIPDB and Version
5000 Enhancement license.
With Version 5000 or higher CPU software, the CCIS Call Back feature has been
added. This allows a station to set a CCIS Call Back request when a station dialed
across CCIS is busy. When this feature has been set, the setting station will
receive a call back as soon as the busy station becomes available. This feature
requires the Version 5000 or higher software and Version 5000 Enhancement
license.
When using Version 5000 or higher software, InMail is supported in a CCIS
network for centralized voice mail.
With SV8100 Version 5000 (5.00 or higher) software and PZ-IPLB daughter
board installed, half duplex connections are not supported. For troubleshooting
purposes, a managed switch capable of port mirroring is required to capture packet
data from the SV8100 IPLB Ethernet port.
The system uses the PZ-32IPLA/IPLB, PZ-64IPLA/IPLB or PZ-128IPLA/IPLB
daughter board to connect multiple systems together over a Data Communication IP
Network (Intranet). Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (KCCIS) is used to
provide telephony services between the UNIVERGE SV8100 and another
UNIVERGE SV8100 or a NEAX PBX system.
General Description Manual
2 - 47
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
CCIS Networking via IP (Non Peer-to-Peer Connections Basis).

IP trunk connections over CCIS Networking via IP provide telephony services
between UNIVERGE SV8100 and UNIVERGE SV8100 and a NEAX IPS, IPX,
SV7000, UNIVERGE SV8300 and UNIVERGE SV8500.

The UNIVERGE SV8100 uses the NEC proprietary CCIS Peer to Peer protocol
over IP to communicate from system to system.

The PZ-(X)IPLA/IPLB is required for connections between IP terminals and IP
trunks. Only one PZ-(X)IPLA/IPLB daughter board can be accommodated per
system with a maximum of 128 DSP resources per system.
The PZ-(X)IPLA/IPLB daughter board is an optional interface package for converting
the Real Time Transfer Protocol (RTP) packets on the IP network to PCM highway. IP
telephones must be connected directly to the IP bus. When IP telephones are
required to be connected to conventional PCM based digital circuit, the PZ-(X)IPLA/
IPLB converts IP packet signals. The PZ-(X)IPLA/IPLB provides the digital signal
processors (DSPs) for IP stations and trunks.
A DSP provides format conversion from circuit switched networks (TDM) to packet
switched networks (IP). Each voice channel from the circuit switched network is
compressed and packetized for transmission over the packet network. In the reverse
direction, each packet is buffered for de-jittering, decompressed, and sent to the
circuit switched network. Each DSP converts a single speech channel from IP to TDM
and vice versa.
CCIS Networking via IP (Peer-to-Peer Connections Basis)
IP-KCCIS has been improved to support Peer-to-Peer calls between IP
Terminals residing in different offices, without using DSP resources. With
Version 4000 or lower software, two DSP resources in each office/system were
consumed for calls between an IP Terminal and an IP Terminal.
K-CCIS – IP with PVA
Enhancements
Version 3000 (3.01 or higher) CPU software and K-CCIS – IP Compact Flash
with PVA License is required.
When using Version 5000 or higher software, InMail is supported in a CCIS
network for centralized voice mail.
The K-CCIS – IP with PVA feature provides the benefits and additional feature
compatibility of Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS) between
multiple systems including NEAX PBX systems connected together over a Data
Communication IP Network (Intranet). Voice Signals and common signaling from and
to distant offices are converted into IP packets and transmitted through the Data IP
Network. When using this feature, both Voice and Data Communication lines are
integrated into one network and communication costs can be reduced.
2 - 48
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
This feature is available between UNIVERGE SV8100, Electra Elite IPK II, Electra
Elite IPK and NEAX PBX systems.
The following features are provided:

Automatic Recall

Brokerage Hotline

Call Forwarding – All Calls

Call Forwarding – Busy/No Answer

Call Park Retrieve

Call Transfer – All Calls

Calling Name Display

Calling Number Display

Calling Party Number (CPN) Presentation from Station

Centralized Billing

Centralized BLF (K-CCIS)

Centralized Day/Night Mode Change

Centralized E911

Dial Access to Attendant

Direct Inward Dialing

Dual Hold

Elapsed Time Display

Flexible Numbering of Stations

Hands-Free Answerback

Hot Line

Link Reconnect

Multiple Call Forwarding – All Calls

Multiple Call Forwarding – Busy/No Answer

Paging Access

Quick Transfer to Voice Mail

Station-to-Station Calling

Uniform Numbering Plan

Voice Call
General Description Manual
2 - 49
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100

Voice Mail Integration
Not supported with VM8000 InMail.
Not supported with NEAX PBX.

Not supported with IPK/IPK II.


K-CCIS – T1
Enhancements
With Version 5000 or higher CPU software, the CCIS Call Back feature has been
added. This allows a station to set a CCIS Call Back request when a station dialed
across CCIS is busy. When this feature has been set, the setting station will
receive a call back as soon as the busy station becomes available. This feature
requires the Version 5000 or higher software and Version 5000 Enhancement
license.
When using Version 5000 or higher software, InMail is supported in a CCIS
network for centralized voice mail.
Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS) allows multiple systems to be
connected to provide additional feature compatibility, above what normal Tie Lines
provide. The system is configured with a 24 channel T1 Connection and CD-CCTA for
receiving or transmitting common signaling data from/to a distant office. The system
can provide a variety of interoffice service features such as Calling Name display,
Centralized Voice Mail Integration, or Link Reconnect.
The following features are provided:
2 - 50

Call Forwarding – All Calls – K-CCIS

Call Forwarding – Busy/No Answer – K-CCIS

Call Park Retrieve – K-CCIS

Call Transfer – All Calls – K-CCIS

Calling Name Display – K-CCIS

Calling Number Display – K-CCIS

Calling Party Number (CPN) Presentation from Station – K-CCIS

Centralized Billing – K-CCIS

Centralized BLF (K-CCIS)

Centralized Day/Night Mode Change – K-CCIS

Centralized E911 (K-CCIS)

Dial Access to Attendant – K-CCIS

Direct Inward Dialing – K-CCIS

Dual Hold – K-CCIS
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0

Elapsed Time Display – K-CCIS

Flexible Numbering of Stations – K-CCIS

Hands-Free Answerback – K-CCIS

Hot Line – K-CCIS

IP (K-CCIS)

IP (K-CCIS) to NEAX (Point-to-Multipoint)

Link Reconnect – K-CCIS

Multiple Call Forwarding – All Calls – K-CCIS

Multiple Call Forwarding – Busy/No Answer – K-CCIS

Paging Access – K-CCIS

Quick Transfer to Voice Mail – K-CCIS

Station-to-Station Calling – K-CCIS

Uniform Numbering Plan – K-CCIS

Voice Call – K-CCIS

Voice Mail Integration – K-CCIS 

Not supported with VM8000 InMail.
Last Number Redial
Enhancements
Improved Cursor Key operation (Version 3000 or higher software).
Last Number Redial allows an extension user to quickly redial the last number dialed.
For example, a user may quickly recall a busy or unanswered number without
manually dialing the digits.
Last Number Redial saves the last 24 digits a user dials in system memory. The
number can be any combination of digits 0~9, # and . The system remembers the
digits regardless of whether the call was answered, unanswered or busy. The system
normally uses the same trunk group as for the initial call. However, the extension
user can preselect a specific trunk if desired.
When the Redial key is pressed, the display indicates REDIAL [#] / SYS. The user can
then press # to redial the number displayed, or enter a System Speed Dialing bin
number to be dialed. Pressing Redial repeatedly scrolls through the last 10 numbers
dialed.
General Description Manual
2 - 51
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Licensing
Enhancements
The NAPT feature requires a Version 3000 or higher system license in order to be
activated.
A CD-CP00-US (CPU) can be upgrade to a Version 3000 or higher system
software however, the NAPT feature will not function unless a Version 3000 or
higher system license is applied.
When upgrading to Version 3100 or higher software, four IP Terminal Basic
licenses are provided. If a system with Version 3000 (3.01 or lower) is upgraded
to Version 3100 software, the system gains four IP Terminal licenses as soon as it
is upgraded.
With Version 4.0 or higher PcPro and Version 4000 or higher CPU software,
system license information is saved to the database.
With Version 5000 or higher software, Temporary License is supported up to 10
days.
With Version 5000 software, the following features have been added:

FAX Enhancement.

Callback to cell phone.

Memo Display Function.

VM8000 InMail – Automatic Access to VM by Caller ID (CID).

ACD Skill Based Routing.

Paging, External (VRS).

CCIS Call Back.
With Version 6000 software, the following features have been added:

VM8000 InMail
Additionally, the following also require Version 6000 Enhancement license (0035):

Automatic message playback of new messages.

Find-Me Follow-Me schedule by day of week in addition to time of day.

Cascade Message Notification schedule by day of week in addition to time of day.

Save message as new after listening.
With Version 7000 software, the following features have been added:

Recognize Extension Location When Logging In With NetLink System.

Analog Trunk Codec Filter, Auto Adjustment.

E.164 Support.

Improved Hotel Room Status PMS Codes.

Incoming Ring Tone / Call Volume Enhancement.

Operation Improvement for General Purpose Relay.
Additionally, the following also require Version 7000 Enhancement license(0036).

2 - 52
Expand ARS Table For NetLink.
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Enhancements (Continued)

Intercom SMDR.

Ecology feature.

Security feature.

Improvement for email notification. Maintenance License (0043) required.

DID Enhancement with Day of Week.
Licenses are used to activate certain features and applications for the UNIVERGE
SV8100. Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual for
more details.
Temporary License
With Version 5000 or higher software, Temporary License activates all valid
feature licenses and all port maximum licenses. Temporary License is
programmed using Telephone programming only. Web/PC pro can be used
when verifying the settings.
The Temporary License can be set up to a maximum number of 10 days.
Line Preference
Line Preference determines how a multiline terminal user places and answers calls.
There are two types of Line Preference: Incoming Line Preference and Outgoing Line
Preference.
Incoming Line Preference
Incoming Line Preference establishes how a multiline terminal user answers calls.
When a call rings the multiline terminal, lifting the handset answers either the ringing
call (for Ringing Line Preference) or seizes an idle line (for Idle Line Preference). The
idle line can provide either Intercom or trunk dial tone (see Outgoing Line Preference
below). Ringing Line Preference helps users whose primary function is to answer
calls (such as a receptionist). Idle Line Preference is an aid to users whose primary
function is to place calls (such as a telemarketer).
Outgoing Line Preference
Outgoing Line Preference sets how a multiline terminal user places calls. If a multiline
terminal has Outgoing Intercom Line Preference, the user hears Intercom dial tone
when the handset is lifted. If a multiline terminal has Outgoing Trunk Line Preference,
the user hears trunk dial tone when the handset is lifted. Outgoing Line Preference
also determines what happens at extensions with Idle Line Preference. The user
hears either trunk (dial 9) or Intercom dial tone.
General Description Manual
2 - 53
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Auto-Answer of Non-Ringing Lines
With Auto-Answer of Non-Ringing Lines, an extension user can automatically answer
trunk calls that ring other extensions (not their own). This helps a user that has to
answer calls for co-workers that are away from their desks. When the user lifts the
handset, they automatically answer the ringing calls based on Trunk Group Routing
programming. The extension user ringing calls, however, always have priority over
calls ringing co-worker extensions.
Long Conversation Cutoff
For incoming and outgoing central office calls, each trunk can be programmed to
disconnect after a defined time. The time begins when the trunk is seized and
disconnects the call after the time expires.
When used with the Warning Tone for Long Conversation feature, the system can
provide a warning tone on outgoing trunks calls before the call is disconnected.
Loop Keys
Enhancements
This feature added with Version 4000.
Loop Keys are uniquely programmed function keys that simplify placing and
answering trunk calls. There are three types of Loop Keys: Incoming Only, Outgoing
Only and Both Ways.

Incoming Only loop keys – answering trunk calls

Outgoing Only loop keys – placing trunk calls

Both Ways loop keys – combine the functions of both Incoming Only and
Outgoing Only loop keys
Maintenance
Enhancements
With Version 7000 or higher software, the Side Tone Auto Setup feature has been
added.
The UNIVERGE SV8100 system has several utilities to assist in troubleshooting and
diagnosing problems both during and after installation.
2 - 54
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
PCPro can remotely access the UNIVERGE SV8100 for maintenance and
diagnostics. Within PCPro, the debug terminal can be accessed to monitor the
systems activity and logging. PCPRo also has built-in reports that can display alarm
data. If need be, an option in PCPro allows the technician to reset or initialize the
system remotely. If the technician determines the problem is isolated to a specific slot,
PCPro can reset only the slot in question.
The SV8100 Maintenance manual contains a number of flow charts to help
technicians diagnose and resolve problems that may arise during and after the
installation of the UNIVERGE SV8100 system.
Side Tone Auto Setup
Per each analog trunk (or all analog trunks) the most suitable Codec Filter setting for
Program 81-07 and Program 81-17 can be automatically adjusted using Programs
90-68-01 and 90-68-02.
Meet Me Conference
With Meet Me Conference, an extension user can set up a Conference with their
current call and up to 31 other internal or external parties. Each party joins the
Conference by dialing a Meet Me Conference code. Meet Me Conference lets
extension users have a telephone meeting – without leaving the office.
The CD-CP00-US provides two blocks of 32 conference circuits, allowing each block
to have any number of internal or external parties conferenced up to the block limit of
32.
Meet Me Paging
Meet Me Paging allows an extension user to Page a co-worker and privately meet
with them on a Page zone. The Paging zone is busy to other users while the meeting
takes place. While the co-workers meet on the zone, no one else can hear the
conversation, join in, or make an announcement using that zone. Meet Me Paging is a
good way to talk to a co-worker when their location is unknown. If the co-worker can
hear the Page, they can join in the conversation.
Meet Me Paging Transfer
If a user wants to Transfer a call to a co-worker but does not know where the
co-worker is, they can use Meet Me Paging Transfer. With Meet Me Paging Transfer,
the user can Page the co-worker and have the call automatically Transfer when the
co-worker answers the Page. Since Meet Me Paging Transfer works with both
Internal and External Paging, a call can be quickly extended to a co-worker anywhere
in the facility.
General Description Manual
2 - 55
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Memo Dial
While on an outside call, Memo Dial lets a multiline terminal user store an important
number for easy redialing later on. The telephone can be like a notepad. For example,
a user could dial Directory Assistance and ask for a client telephone number. When
Directory Assistance plays back the requested number, the caller can use Memo Dial
to jot the number down in the telephone memory. They can quickly call the Memo Dial
number after hanging up.
When a user enters a Memo Dial number, the dialed digits do not output over the
trunk. Dialing Memo Dial digits does not interfere with a call in progress.
Message Waiting
An extension user can leave a Message Waiting indication at a busy or unanswered
extension requesting a return call. The indication is a flashing MW lamp at the called
extension and a steadily lit MW lamp on the calling extension. Answering the
Message Waiting automatically calls the extension that left the indication. Message
Waiting ensures that a user does not have to recall an unanswered extension. It also
ensures that a user does not miss calls when their extension is busy or unattended.
Additionally, Message Waiting lets extension users:

View and selectively answer messages left at their extension (display multiline
terminal only)

Cancel all messages left at their extension

Cancel messages they left at other extensions
An extension user can leave Messages Waiting at any number of extensions. Also,
any number of extensions can leave a Message Waiting at the same extension. A
periodic VRS announcement may remind users that they have Messages Waiting.
MH240 Wireless IP Telephone
Enhancements
This feature added with Version 2500.
The same user name and password can be assigned to IP Multiline Station,
MH240 and Desktop ports when automatic or manual registration is used (Version
3000 or higher software).
With Version 4000 or higher software, a Flash (Recall) key can be placed on a
line key.
With Version 4000 or higher software, the door strike relay can be activated from
the MH240 or Cordless DECT terminal by a Flash Key assigned to a line key in
Program 15-07 (751: 62).
2 - 56
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
The MH240 Wireless IP Telephone is a wireless IP multiline terminal. The WL1700
Controller is the equipment that controls additional WL1500 Access Points (APs) and
has it’s own internal AP. The WL1700 creates an IEEE802.11-standard wireless
network. The MH240 complies with IEEE 802.11b/g specifications and uses a Wi-Fi
network consisting of a WL1700 Controller and WL1500 APs distributed throughout
an enterprise environment.
The MH240 is equipped with Conference, Directory, Disconnect, Enter (select),
History, Hold, Menu, Talk, Transfer, Volume Up, and Volume Down keys as well as
eight programmable function keys.

The MH240 Wireless IP Telephone supports some 3rd Party access points. For a list of the
supported 3rd Party access points, please visit http://www.necunifiedsolutions.com.
Microphone Cutoff
Microphone Cutoff lets a multiline terminal user turn off their telephone handsfree or
handset microphone anytime. When activated, Microphone Mute prevents the caller
from hearing conversations in the user’s work area. The user may turn off the
microphone while their telephone is idle, busy, or ringing. The microphone stays off
until the user turns it back on.
Mobile Extension
Enhancements
With Version 3000 or higher system software, the Desktop terminal and the
Mobile Extension can both ring. If neither extension answers, the call is forwarded
to Voice Mail.
With Version 3000 or higher system software, the Calling Party Number (CPN)
can be delivered to the Mobile Extension user.

Must be coordinated with local Telco.
With Version 3000 or higher system software, the Mobile Extension feature
supports analog trunks.
With Version 5000 software, callback to cell phone has been added.
A mobile extension is an external telephone (preferably a mobile phone) linked to the
UNIVERGE SV8100 via a Proxy Port to operate as an internal single line telephone
extension. The extension sends DTMF signals to the system allowing access to the
system features. A registered Mobile Extension uses one analog port (ports are
reserved in groups of two), however, no PCB support (analog or digital) is required.
The Mobile Extension port must be an unequipped extension port on the SV8100
system – no physical telephone is required on the SV8100 system.
General Description Manual
2 - 57
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Callback to Cell Phone
Callback to Cell Phone allows the user to make an incoming call to a system
then hang up before the system answers (like a one ring call), then the system
calls back to the calling Cell Phone using a pre-programmed number. The
advantage is to reduce Cell Phone charges for calls on a mobile extension
system.
After receiving a call back on a Cell Phone, the user can call another extension
or make an outgoing call via the system using the mobile extension function.
Multiple Trunk Types
The UNIVERGE SV8100 supports many different Trunks in the system (DID, E&M Tie
Lines, Loop Start, Ground Start, ISDN BRI, ISDN PRI, and T-1 trunks). The system
supports up to 200 trunks in the expanded port package, and a maximum of 56 trunks
in the basic port package.
Music on Hold
Music on Hold (MOH) sends music to calls on Hold and parked calls. The music lets
the caller know that his call is waiting, not forgotten. Without Music on Hold, the
system provides silence to these types of calls. The Music on Hold source can be
internal (tone) or from an external customer-provided music source (e.g., tape deck,
or receiver, etc.). The customer-provided source can connect to a PGD(2)-U10 ADP
analog port or to a connector on the CD-CP00-US.
Option Available for Using System Tone
The Music on Hold feature is enhanced to allow callers to hear a system tone instead
of playing the internal or external music.

In accordance with U.S. copyright law, a license may be required from the American Society of
Composers, Authors and Publishers (ASCAP) or other similar organizations, if radio, television
broadcasts or music other than material not in the public domain are transmitted through the
Music on Hold feature of telecommunications systems. NEC America, NEC Unified Solutions,
Inc., and NEC Infrontia hereby disclaim any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a
license.
Name Storing
Extensions and trunks can have names instead of circuit numbers. These names
show on a multiline terminal display when the user places or answers calls. Extension
and trunk names make it easier to identify callers. The user does not have to refer to
a directory when processing calls. A name can have up to 12 digits, consisting of
alphanumeric characters, punctuation marks and spaces.
2 - 58
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Additional Characters Available
When using the Name Storing feature, the system now provides additional characters
which can be used. These characters are available with any option that allows Name
Storing – Speed Dial – System/Group/Station, One-Touch Keys, Extension Name,
Trunk Naming.
Night Service
Night Service lets system users activate one of the Night Service modes. Night
Service redirects calls to their night mode destination, as determined by Assigned and
Universal Night Answer programming. A user typically activates Night Service after
normal working hours, when most employees are unavailable to answer calls. The
system also provides external contacts to assign one of eight Night Service modes.
Off-Hook Signaling
Off-Hook Signaling alerts a multiline terminal user that an incoming outside call is
ringing to the station during another call. Off-Hook Signaling helps important callers
get through, without waiting in line for the called extension to become free. The
system provides the following Off-Hook Signaling options:

Called Extension Block

Automatic Signaling

Manual Signaling

Selectable Off-Hook Signaling Mode

Off-Hook Ringing

DID Call Waiting

Block Manual Off-Hook Signals

Block Camp On
One-Touch Calling
One-Touch Calling gives a multiline terminal user one-button access to extensions,
trunks, speed dial bins and selected system features. This saves time when
accessing co-workers, clients, and features they use most often. Instead of dialing a
series of codes, the user need only press the One-Touch key. An extension user can
have One-Touch keys programmed for:

Direct Station Selection – one-button access to extensions

Station Speed Dial – one-button access to stored numbers (up to 24 digits)

Speed Dial – System/Group/Station – one-button access to stored speed
dialing numbers

Trunk Calling – one-button access to trunks or trunk groups

Service Codes – one-button access to specific Service Codes
General Description Manual
2 - 59
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
An extension user can chain dial with One-Touch Keys. For example, a user can
store the number for a company Automated Attendant in key 1 and employee
extension numbers in keys 2~5. The user can press key 1 to call the company, then
one of keys 2~5 to ring the employee to whom they want to speak.
An extension user or system administrator can optionally store a Flash command
under a One-Touch key. This is helpful for One-Touch Keys used as Station Speed
Dial bins. The stored Flash may be helpful to access features of the connected Telco,
PBX or Centrex.
Operator
When an extension user dials 0, calls are routed to a main system Operator. The
Operator can answer and route outside calls or locate employees using the Page
feature.
A maximum of eight Operators is available.
(OPX) Off-Premise Extension
Off-Premise Extension allows a single line telephone, located remotely from the main
installation site, to access the system features with the same abilities as an
on-premise single line telephone.
Paging, External
With External Paging, a user can broadcast announcements over paging equipment
connected to external Paging zones. When a user pages one of these external zones,
the system broadcasts the announcement over the speakers. Like Internal Paging,
External Paging allows a user to locate another employee or make an announcement
without calling each extension individually.
The UNIVERGE SV8100 system allows up to eight External Paging zones, or a
common zone output provided by the CPU (Speaker 9). All other speakers (1~8)
require a port on a PGD(2)-U10 ADP, with a maximum of two external paging circuits
per module. You must have four PGD(2)-U10 ADPs to get the eight external zones.
Each external zone has an associated relay contact. When a user pages to a zone,
the corresponding contact activates (closes). This provides for Paging amplifier
control.
Combined Paging
Use Combined Paging when you want to simultaneously Page into an internal and
corresponding external zone. For example, you can Page your company warehouse
and outside loading dock at the same time. Combined Paging is available for zones
1~8 and All Call. You can program a Function Key as a Combined Paging key. Using
the External Page Function Key, when an All Call External Page Function Key is
programmed, it includes both the external zones and the assigned internal zone(s). If
the internal page zone is busy or there are no extensions in a page group, the
announcement is made on the external zones only.
2 - 60
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Paging, External (VRS)
Enhancements
This feature added with Version 5000.
Paging, External (VRS) enables the use of prerecorded VRS messages for External
Paging. The advantage of this feature is saving time for the users who regularly use
External Paging with the same announcements.
Paging, Internal
Internal Paging lets extension users broadcast announcements to other multiline
terminal users. When a user makes a Zone Paging announcement, the
announcement broadcasts to all idle extensions in the zone dialed. With All Call
Paging, the announcement broadcasts to all idle extensions programmed to receive
All Call Paging. An extension can be a member of only one Internal Paging Zone. Like
External Paging, Internal Paging allows a user to locate another employee or make
an announcement without calling each extension individually.
Combined Paging
Use Combined Paging when you want to simultaneously Page into an internal and
corresponding external zone. For example, you can Page your company warehouse
and outside loading dock at the same time. Combined Paging is available for Paging
zones 1~8 and All Call. Optionally, you can change the Combined Paging
assignments. For example, you can associate External Paging Zone 1 with Internal
Paging Zone 4. You can program a Function Key as a Combined Paging key. When
an All Call External Page Function Key is programmed, it includes both the external
zones and the assigned internal zone(s). If the internal page zone is busy or there are
no extensions in a page group, the announcement is made on the external zones
only.
Park
Enhancements
Calls can be parked from a virtual extension (Version 3000 or higher software).
With Version 5000 or higher software, calls can be parked at a co-worker's
extension.
General Description Manual
2 - 61
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Park places a call in a wait state (called a Park Orbit) so that an extension user may
pick it up. There are two types of Park: System and Personal. System Park allows a
user to have a call wait in System Orbit. Personal Park allows a user to Park a call at
their extension so a co-worker can pick it up. After parking a call in orbit, a user can
Page the person receiving the call and hang up. The paged party can dial a code or
press a programmed Park key to pick up the call. With Park, it is not necessary to
locate a person to handle their calls. A call parked for too long recalls the extension
that initially parked it, however the call remains in the park orbit until it is answered.
There are 64 Park Orbits (1~64) available for use.
Extended Park
An extension Class of Service determines whether it uses the normal Park Orbit
Recall time or the Extended Park Orbit Recall time. The times are set in system
programming. When an extension with Extended Park Recall Class of Service option
parks a call, it recalls after the Extended Park Orbit Recall time. When an extension
with the Normal Park Orbit Recall Class of Service option parks a call, it recalls after
the normal Park Orbit Recall time, however the call remains in the park orbit until it is
answered.
Programmable Function Key and Service Code Available for Personal Park
The Personal Park feature is enhanced by using a Programmable Function Key or
service code (3-digit or 1-digit) to place a call in Personal Park. This option is
available for multiline terminals, single line sets, and UNIVERGE SV8100 Wireless
telephones and can be used for analog or ISDN trunks.
Personal Park at a Co-Worker’s Extension
The Personal Park feature allows an extension user to place an outside call,
which is on hold, on Personal Park at a co-worker’s extension after placing an
intercom call. This feature is available for keysets, SLTs, IP terminals and IP
DECT terminals.
PBX Compatibility
You can connect your telephone system trunks to Centrex/PBX lines, rather than to
Telco trunk circuits. This makes the trunk inputs into the system 500/2500 type
compatible Centrex/PBX extensions, rather than Telco circuits. PBX Compatibility
lets the system be a node (i.e., satellite) in a larger private telephone network. To
place outside calls when the system is behind a PBX, telephone system users must
first dial the PBX trunk access code (usually 9).
The system provides the following PBX Compatibility options:

PBX Trunk Access Code Screening
The system can monitor the numbers users dial and screen for PBX trunk
access codes. The system can screen for up to four groups of trunk access
codes. The codes can have one or two digits, consisting of the digits 0~9, # and
. (You can use Line Key 1 as a wild card entry.)
2 - 62
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100

Issue 10.0
PBX Trunk Toll Restriction
The system can provide the Toll Restriction for the PBX trunk, or restriction can
be handled solely by the connected PBX. If the telephone system provides the
restriction, it restricts the digits dialed after the PBX access code.

PBX Call Restriction
When the telephone system does the Toll Restriction, it can further restrict users
from dialing PBX extensions. In this case, the only valid numbers are those
dialed after the PBX trunk access code. The only PBX facilities telephone
system users can access are the PBX outside trunks.

Automatic Pause
The system automatically pauses when it sees a PBX trunk access code during
manual dialing, Speed Dialing, Last Number Redial, Repeat Redial and Save
Number Dialed. This gives the connected PBX time to set up its trunk circuits.
PC Programming
Enhancements
With Version 4.00 software, PCPro can migrate a UX5000 database to a SV8100
database and set the database to UX5000 defaults. Also, PCPro can download
the DIM logs from the system for engineering troubleshooting and save the license
information for the system.
With Version 4000 or higher, WebPro is enhanced to include the Maintenance
Debug option. This allows the WebPro user to enable and disable debug traces for
troubleshooting.
With SV8100 Version 5000 (5.00 or higher) software and PZ-IPLB daughter
board installed, half duplex connections are not supported. For troubleshooting
purposes, a managed switch capable of port mirroring is required to capture packet
data from the SV8100 IPLB Ethernet port.
With Version 6000 or higher software, Outbound IP Connection is supported.
The UNIVERGE SV8100 has three different methods for programming. The first is via
the handset, the second is by PCPro and third by WebPro.
PCPro is a Microsoft Windows based application. It allows the technician/system
administrator to download a database from the system, make changes, and then
upload.
The WebPro application is a web server running on the CD-CP00-US blade of the
system. No special installation program is required. A user programs the system
using their standard web browser.
General Description Manual
2 - 63
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Outbound IP Connection
Outbound IP Connection for PC Programming allows the system to make a PC
Pro Connection via an outgoing call over IP, to a pre-programmed IP Address,
upon receipt of an incoming CO call matching a pre-programmed CLI. When the
target number of DID incoming call matches with the service code of ‘Outbound
IP Connection’ the SV8100 compares the received CLI with the registered CLI
(Program 90-69-03). When the received caller ID and registered caller ID match,
the SV8100 sends a TCP establishment request to a waiting PCPro application.
When the caller ID does not match, a busy tone is sent to the caller.
Alternatively, via dialing service code from a Multiline Terminal, an outgoing IP
connection can be made to a waiting PCPro terminal with a pre-programmed IP
Address. This allows for a pre-authorized connection for programming purposes
without using CO Lines and potentially reducing the cost of calls for
maintenance. A fixed, encrypted, user ID and password are used to verify the
connection.
Power Failure Transfer
Power Failure Transfer ensures that a customer has access to the Central Office
network during a power outage. The CO/PBX tip and ring are automatically
transferred to a DTH or ITH multiline terminal with a PSA-L adapter installed.
Prime Line Selection
Prime Line Selection allows a multiline terminal user to place or answer a call over a
specific trunk by lifting the handset. The user does not have to press keys or dial
codes. This simplifies handling calls on a frequently used trunk.
Prime Line Selection has the following two modes of operation:

Outgoing Prime Line Preference
Lifting the handset seizes the Prime Line. Outgoing Prime Line Preference
would help a telemarketer who always needs a free line to call prospective
clients. The telemarketer lifts the handset and the Prime Line is always
available. (Outgoing Prime Line Preference may be affected by Incoming Prime
Line Preference).

Incoming Prime Line Preference
When the Prime Line rings the extension, lifting the handset answers the call.
Incoming Prime Line Preference could benefit the Service Department
dispatcher who must quickly answer customer service calls and then dispatch
repair technicians. When a customer calls in, the dispatcher lifts the handset to
get their call. (Incoming Prime Line Preference can optionally seize an idle line
appearance.)
2 - 64
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Private Line
A Private Line is a trunk reserved for a multiline terminal for placing and answering
calls. A user with a Private Line always knows when important calls are for them.
Additionally, the user has their own trunk for placing calls that is not available to
others in the system.
Programmable Function Keys
Each multiline terminal has Programmable Function Keys that simplify placing calls,
answering calls, and using certain features. You can customize the function of a
multiline terminal programmable key from each multiline terminal. Depending on your
telephone style, you can have up to 48 Programmable Function Keys.
Programming from a Multiline Terminal
System Programming can be performed from any display multiline terminal. Most
programming changes become effective immediately. Other programming changes
become effective after the data is backed up from temporary memory to permanent
memory.
Pulse to Tone Conversion
An extension user can use Pulse to Tone Conversion on trunk calls. Pulse to Tone
Conversion lets a user change their extension dialing mode while placing a call. For
systems in a Dial Pulse area, this permits users to access dial-up Other Common
Carriers (OCCs) such as MCI from their DP area. The user can, for example:

Place a call to an OCC over a DP trunk.

Depending on programming:
Manually implement Pulse to Tone Conversion.
- OR -
Wait 10 seconds.

Dial the OCC security code and desired number. The system dials the DTMF
digits after the conversion.
Redial Function
Enhancements
With Version 5000 (V5.00) or higher software, names and numbers stored as a
common or group speed dial can be displayed for redialed numbers. The Version
5000 Enhancement license is also required.
General Description Manual
2 - 65
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Users can press Redial to cycle through the last 10 outside numbers dialed. Pressing
# redials the number displayed. Users can also press Redial and dial a System Speed
Dial bin number to access System Speed Dial.
Remote (System) Upgrade
Enhancements
To upgrade main system software from a remote requires the installation of USB.
With Version 6000 or higher system software and using an MEMDB, installation
of USB on the system is not required for remotely upgrading the system.
With PC Programming, the UNIVERGE SV8100 can be remotely upgraded to a
newer version of main system software. When a new version of main system software
is released, a firmware package file is provided. Using the PCPro application, a
technician can remotely upgrade the firmware on the CD-CP00-US. The upgrade can
be applied immediately, or at a scheduled date and time. Remote Upgrade is
supported only via a LAN connection. A modem or serial connection is NOT
supported for Remote Upgrade.
Repeat Redial
If a multiline terminal user places a trunk call that is busy or unanswered, they can
have Repeat Redial try it again later on. The user does not continually have to try the
number again – hoping it goes through. Repeat Redial automatically retries it until the
called party answers (the number of retries is based on system programming).
Resident System Program
When power is applied to the system, the hardware configuration is scanned and
Resident System Program default values are assigned including terminal types [e.g.,
PGD(2)-U10 ADP or DSS Console]. This enables immediate operation, even before
the system is programmed to accommodate the individual site requirements.
Reverse Voice Over
While on a call, Reverse Voice Over lets a busy multiline terminal user make a private
Intercom call to an idle co-worker. The idle co-worker can be at a multiline terminal or
single line telephone. The busy user presses a programmed Reverse Voice Over key
to make a private call to a specified co-worker. The initial caller cannot hear the
Reverse Voice Over conversation. The private Intercom call continues until the
Reverse Voice Over caller presses the key again. The initial call can be an outside
call or an Intercom call.
Reverse Voice Over could help a salesman, for example, when placing a call to an
important client. The salesman can talk with the client and give special instructions to
a secretary – without interrupting the initial call.
2 - 66
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
When the multiline terminal is idle, the Reverse Voice Over key functions the same as
a Hotline or One-Touch key. A multiline terminal Reverse Voice Over key also shows
at a glance the status of the associated extension:

When the key is. . .
The associated extension is. . .
Off
Idle
On
Busy or call ringing
Fast Flash
In Do Not Disturb
When the destination extension is idle, the Reverse Voice Over provides one button calling to the
associated extension (like a Hotline key). An extension user cannot, however, use the Reverse
Voice Over key to Transfer calls by one-touch operation.
Ring Groups
Ring Groups determine how trunks ring extensions. Generally, trunks ring extensions
only if Ring Group programming allows. For example, to make a trunk ring an
extension:

Assign the trunk and the extension to the same Ring Group.

In the extension Ring Group programming, assign ringing for the trunk.
Any number of extensions and trunks can be in a specific group.
The system allows:

Ring Groups = 1~100

In-Skin Voice Mail = 102

Centralized Voice Mail = 103
If an extension has a line key for the trunk, Ring Group calls ring the line key. If the
extension does not have a line key, the trunk rings the line appearance key. If an
extension has a key for a trunk that is not in its ring group, the trunk follows Access
Map programming.
Ringdown Extension, Internal/External
With a Ringdown Extension, a user can call another extension, outside number, or
Speed Dialing number by lifting the handset. The call automatically goes
through – there is no need for the user to dial digits or press additional keys.
Ringdown Extensions are frequently used for lobby telephones, where the caller lifts
the handset to get the information desk or off-site Reservation Desk.
After the Ringdown Extension user lifts the handset, ringdown occurs after a
programmable interval. Depending on the setting of this interval, the extension user
may be able to place other calls before the ringdown goes through.
General Description Manual
2 - 67
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Room Monitor
Room Monitor lets an extension user listen to the sounds in a co-worker’s area. For
example, the receptionist could listen for sounds in the warehouse when it is left
unattended. To use Room Monitor, the initiating extension and the receiving
extension must activate it.
When using multiline terminals for monitoring, an extension user can only monitor one
extension at a time. Many extensions can monitor the same extension at the same
time. However, only one single line telephone can monitor another single line
telephone at a time.
Room Monitor for Single Lines
This option enables you to monitor the room status through your single line
telephones. Between multiline terminals, the monitored room status is picked up by
the telephone microphone and the activity is heard through the speaker of the
monitoring multiline terminal. Between single line telephones, at the station to be
monitored, a user goes off-hook and dials a service code and the extension number of
the monitoring telephone. At the monitoring station, a user goes off-hook and dials a
service code and the extension number of the monitored telephone.
The activity of the area where the monitored telephone is placed can then be heard at
the monitoring telephone. This service is available until the handset of the monitored
telephone is placed on-hook.
The use of monitoring, recording, or listening devices to eavesdrop,
monitor, retrieve, or record telephone conversation or other sound
activities, whether or not contemporaneous with transmission, may
be illegal in certain circumstances under federal or state laws.
Legal advice should be sought prior to implementing any practice
that monitors or records any telephone conversation. Some federal
and state laws require some form of notification to all parties to a
telephone conversation, such as using a beep tone or other
notification methods or requiring the consent of all parties to the
telephone conversation, prior to monitoring or recording the
telephone conversation. Some of these laws incorporate strict
penalties.
Save Number Dialed
Save Number Dialed allows an extension user to save their last outside number
dialed and easily redial it later on. For example, an extension user can recall a busy or
unanswered number without manually dialing the digits. The system retains the saved
number until the user stores a new one in its place or clears the stored one.
2 - 68
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Save Number Dialed saves in system memory a dialed number up to 24 digits. The
number can be any combination of digits 0~9, # and . The system remembers the
digits regardless of whether the call was answered, unanswered or busy. The system
normally uses the same trunk group as for the initial call. However, the extension
user can preselect a specific trunk if desired.
Secondary Incoming Extension
Enhancements
With Version 3000 or higher system software, the appropriate line key page
automatically displays for incoming calls on the DTL-8LD-1 (DESI-Less) and
ITL-320C-1 terminals.
Secondary Incoming Extensions (SIEs) are incoming appearance keys of actual
stations assigned in the system. SIE keys are assigned to programmable function
keys and can appear on an individual station, or multiple stations. Incoming internal
calls, ringing DIL/Tie/DID/CO Transfer calls, or call forwarded calls can be picked up
from an SIE.
Secretary Call (Buzzer)
Secretary Call lets two co-workers alert each other without disturbing their work. To
have Secretary Call, both co-workers must have multiline terminals with Secretary
Call buzzer keys. When a user presses their buzzer key, the system alerts the called
extension by sending a splash tone and flashing the called extension buzzer key. The
called user can respond by placing an Intercom call to the calling party.
The called extension buzzer key continues to flash and the splash tone is heard until
either user cancels the Secretary Call. A secretary could use this feature, for
example, to get a message through to the boss in an important meeting. After being
alerted, the boss could call the secretary when it is most convenient.
An extension can have Secretary Call keys for any number of extensions, limited only
by the available number of programmable keys.
Secretary Call Pickup
Secretary Call Pickup lets a multiline terminal user easily reroute calls intended for a
co-worker to themselves. By pressing a Secretary Call Pickup key, the user can have
all calls to a co-worker telephone ring or voice-announce theirs instead. Secretary
Call Pickup is a simplified type of Call Forward with Follow Me for employees that
work closely together. This feature is helpful to customer service representatives that
must frequently cover other clients. When a representative leaves their desk, an
associate could press the Secretary Call Pickup key to intercept all their calls.
An extension can have Secretary Call Pickup keys for any number of extensions,
limited only by the available number of programmable keys.
General Description Manual
2 - 69
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Security
Enhancements
Security feature added with Version 7000 or higher software and requires
Version 7000 Enhancement License (0036).
This system supports the following built-in simple security features:

Warning Message (Watch Mode)
Automatically and periodically send the Watching (VRS) Message from built-In
Speaker on Multiline Terminal or external paging adapter during nightmode.
Enable to accommodate with 3rd Party PIR (Passive Infrared Sensor) or
Emergency Button to provide security feature such as Auto-Emergency Call
with Warning (VRS) Message sending.

Remote Inspection
Automatically ring the terminal with pre-programmed schedule in order to check
whether users answer or not. If not answered, Emergency Call is placed to
predefined destination automatically.
Selectable Display Messaging
An extension user can select a programmed Selectable Display Message for their
extension. Display multiline terminal callers see the selected message when they call
the user extension. Selectable Display Messaging provides personalized messaging.
For example, an extension user could select the message GONE FOR THE DAY.
Any display multiline terminal user calling the extension may hear a DND signal and
then see the message. See table below for a list of the standard messages.
An extension user can add digits for date, time or telephone number after messages
1~8 and 10 (up to 24 characters). For example, an extension user could select the
message ON VACATION UNTIL and then enter the date. Callers see the original
message followed by the appended date. They could then tell when the user was
coming back from vacation. The system allows all telephones to use the Selectable
Display Messaging feature at the same time.
All telephones can use Selectable Display Messaging at one time.
2 - 70
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
The default messages are:
Table 2-2 Selectable Display Messaging Defaults
No.
Message
Change “#” to...
1
IN MEETING UNTIL ##:##
Time (when meeting done)
2
MEETING ROOM - ########
Room Name or extension
3
COME BACK ##:##
Time (when returning)
4
PLEASE CALL ###########
11 digits (telephone number)
5
BUSY CALL AFTER ##:##
Time (when returning)
6
OUT FOR LUNCH BACK ##:##
Time (when returning)
7
BUSINESS TRIP BACK ##/##
Date (when returning)
8
BUSINESS TRIP ##########
10 digits (where reached)
9
GONE FOR THE DAY
10
ON VACATION UNTIL ##/##
11~20
MESSAGE 11~20
Date (when returning)
Selectable Ring Tones
An extension user can change the way trunks or internal calls ring their telephone.
Selectable Ring Tones allow an extension user to set up unique ringing for their calls.
This is important in a crowded work area where several telephones are close
together. Because their telephone has a characteristic ring, the user always can tell
when their telephone is ringing.
Serial Call
Serial Call transfers a call so it automatically returns to the transferring extension.
Serial Calling saves transferring steps between users. For example, a Customer
Service Representative (CSR) has a client on the telephone who needs technical
advice. The CSR wants to send the call to Technical Service, but needs to advise the
client of certain costs when Technical Service is done. Rather than transferring the
call back and forth, the CSR can use Serial Call to Technical Service and announce,
“I have Ted on the telephone. I need to talk to him again. Just hang up when you’re
done, and I’ll get him back.”
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
SV8100 system software Version 6.0 or higher contains Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP) support that functions with Private MIB’s and SNMP
traps. Typically, an administrator uses an SNMP application to centrally manage
network devices. Using SNMP on the SV8100 allows it to be managed alongside
these other network devices. The SV8100 is considered as an SNMP Agent that can
talk to an SNMP application.
General Description Manual
2 - 71
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Private MIBS allow an SNMP application to make very specific requests to the
SV8100 to obtain useful information from the system. Below are examples of the
different types of information that is available:

Hardware Key Code

Installed Hardware

System Software

System Date and Time

Installed licenses

VOIP Information
Single Line Telephones, Analog 500/2500 Sets
The system is compatible with 500 type (Dial Pulse) and 2500 type (DTMF) analog
single line telephones (SLTs). You can install single line telephones as On-Premise or
Off-Premise extensions. Single line telephone users can dial codes to access many of
the features available to multiline terminal users. With single line telephones, you can
have your system simulate PBX operation.
There are 320 single line telephones available (this number may be restricted due to
system power requirements).
When installing single line telephones you must have:

A port on an LCA blade for each single line telephone installed.

If you have 2500 sets, at least one block reserved on the CD-CP00-US for
analog extension DTMF reception.
DTMF Dial Out Timer Added
A program is added for DTMF dialing, Program 20-03-07 : System Options for Single
Line Telephones – Trunk Call Dial Forced Sending Start Time (Forced Dial). When
Program 20-03-03 : System Options for Single Line Telephones – SLT DTMF Dial to
Trunk Lines is set to 0 (receive all digits before sending), the system follows the timers
in Program 20-03-04 and Program 20-03-07.
The timer in Program 20-03-04 System Options for Single Line Telephones – Dial
Sending Start Time for SLT or ARS resets when the user dials another digit.
The timer in Program 20-03-07 does not reset when a digit is dialed. The user must
finish dialing all the digits before this timer expires (entries: 0~64800 seconds,
default: 0).
2 - 72
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
SLT Adapter
The SLT (Single Line Telephone) Adapter allows a port of a CD-8DLCA, PZ-8DLCB,
CD-16DLCA or CD-LTA to support a single line telephone. A single line telephone
can be connected to the DLC port using the SLT Adapter and 2-wire cable. 64
SLTII(1)-U ADP Single Line Telephone Adapters can be installed in the UNIVERGE
SV8100 system.
SMB8000 Communications Analyst
Enhancements
With Version 3.1 (build # 5278), SMB8000 Communications Analyst is supported
on Windows 7 32-bit platforms.
SMB8000 Communications Analyst is an easy to use, graphically oriented software
package that allows you to monitor and analyze telephone calls, understand
telephone usage, and cut costs. Incoming and outgoing calls are tracked accurately
along with the date and time of the call. When the incoming telephone call must be
tracked with name and/or telephone numbers, SMB8000 Communications Analyst
requires Caller ID service from the local telephone company.
SMB8000 Communications Analyst increases productivity, facilitates billing, and
helps detect toll fraud and telephone abuse. It also has powerful tabular (text) and
graphic report generating ability. Reports include extension/line summaries, date,
time, and department summaries, longest/most expensive calls, and most frequently
called numbers. These reports can be used to analyze your telephone as a critical
business communication tool, improve its business effectiveness, and reduce your
telephone costs. A report can be generated showing calling patterns by volume or
duration on a color-coded United States map. This can help a Customer Support,
Sales Order, or Telemarketing business become more focused, more productive, and
more cost effective.
SMB8000 Communications Analyst keeps track of:

The date and time calls were made or received

The duration of each call

Which extension made or received the call

The CID/ANI, DNIS of the caller

The trunk or line numbers that handled the call

Account codes and authorization codes used for the call

CCIS calls are now logged with extension number and trunks used for CCIS.
These trunks can be placed in a different line group to track usage across a
CCIS link using the Traffic Analysis add-on feature.
General Description Manual
2 - 73
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
SMB8000 E911 Security Notification
The SMB8000 E911 Security Notification (ESN) Application Suite, an easy-touse yet powerful E911 notification solution. The E911 Security Notification
solution offers robust features designed specifically for business users who want
to make use of the Enhanced 911 call notification during emergencies.

This application requires the latest full build of SMB8000 Communications Analyst to be
installed as a prerequisite.
SMB8000 Conference Bridge
The CD-PVAA is a Conference Bridge that is used in the UNIVERGE SV8100. This
ETU can be licensed to support a 8- or 16-port conference bridge. The SMB8000
Conference Bridge is configured using an Internet Browser. The Login page allows
user name and password access to the web browser. Conferences can be setup to
send Email notification to each participant.
The Conference Bridge Application functionalities include:

Preset Conference

Scheduled Conferences

Two Authentication Levels:

Admin Group

User Group

Phone XML Integration

Update Firmware via Web Interface

Export Conference Log Databases

Import and Export Data

Reports

XL Meeting Link

Telephone Dial Pad Help utilizing DTMF digits
SMB8000 Interactive Voice Response
Enhancements
This feature available with Version 2000.
With Version 6000 (6.02 or higher) software, IVR – Appointment Reminder
Server is supported.
2 - 74
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
SMB8000 Interactive Voice Response (IVR) is a software application that accepts a
combination of voice telephone input, database information, and telephone keypad
selection to provide audio (usually voice) information to callers and databases, place
calls, transfer calls, and send email messages. IVRs also allow callers to provide
voice and data information to be stored in databases used by other user applications.
Common IVR applications include:

Bank and stock account balances and transfers

Surveys and polls

Call center hold and forwarding

Order entry tracking

Simple order entry transactions

Selective information lookup (movie schedules, etc.)
The IVR application uses prerecorded voice, optional text-to-speech, call flow logic,
access to relevant data, and records voice input for later handling. Using computer
telephony integration (CTI), the IVR can hand off a call to someone that can view data
related to the caller at a display.
The programmable IVR uses open database connectivity (ODBC) connection to
databases to allow complete customizing of call flows and information anytime. The
IVR can generate email messages and can be remotely monitored and configured
using a LAN or WAN in a totally secure environment.
Basically, the IVR receives a call, collects information, and forwards the call.
IVR – Appointment Reminder Server
The IVR – Appointment Reminder Server solution is designed to provide a
knowledge-based, intelligent distributed application to optimize the scheduling
and reminder of appointments. The IVR – Appointment Reminder Server is an
external software application that connects to the SV8100 through Standard SIP
Ports. The IVR – Appointment Reminder Server can be configured for 8 – 16
ports using SV8100 licensing.
This IVR – Appointment Reminder Server enables the phone system to
automatically call customers and remind them of their upcoming appointment.
The Appointment Reminder automatically dials based on a configurable
schedule and upon detection of a “live voice” or answering device, delivers one
of your pre-recorded messages. The customer is then provided options to
confirm the appointment or, if they desire, to be able to talk to a customer
service representative.
The Appointment Reminder was designed for the following verticals:

Dentist office

Doctor’s office

Optometrist’s office and other medical offices where scheduling is in
common use.
General Description Manual
2 - 75
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100

Any other office where appointments are made and need to be reminded.
Softkeys
Each display telephone provides interactive Softkeys for intuitive feature access. It is
no longer necessary to remember feature codes to access the telephone advanced
features because the function of the Softkeys change as the user processes calls.
Additional options allow you to fine tune the multiline terminal volume levels for
handset receive and transmit, speaker volume, ringer and handset volume, and
headset volume levels. You can also customize the point at which the built-in
speakerphone switches from transmit to receive; a boon for noisy environments. The
display telephones also have a contrast control for the LCD display.
Speed Dial – System/Group/Station
Enhancements
Improved Cursor Key operation (Version 3000 or higher software).
Speed Dialing gives an extension user quick access to frequently called numbers.
This saves time, for example, when calling a client with whom they deal often.
Instead of dialing a long telephone number, the extension user dials the Speed Dialing
code.
There are three types of Speed Dialing: System, Group and Station. All co-workers
can share the System Speed Dialing numbers. All co-workers in the same Speed
Dialing Group can share the Group Speed Dialing numbers. Station Speed Dialing
numbers are available only at a user extension. The system has 2000 Speed Dialing
bins that you can allocate between System and Group Speed Dialing and a maximum
of 65 Speed Dialing Groups are available. Each extension has 10 Station Speed Dial
bins.
Each Speed Dialing bin can store a number having up to 24 digits.
When placing a Speed Dialing call, the system normally routes the call through Trunk
Group Routing or ARS (whichever is enabled). Or, the user can preselect a specific
trunk for the call. In addition, the system can optionally force System Speed Dialing
numbers to route over a specific Trunk Group. User preselection always overrides
the system routing.
System Bins Limited to 1000 with Speaker Key or #2 Service Code
Though there are 2000 Speed Dialing bins available in the system, once
programmed, these bins can currently only be dialed using the Directory Dial feature
(Press Directory key + SYS softkey + use arrow keys to locate number, or enter the
Speed Dial bin name + Speaker to place call.)
The Speaker and service code #2 operations are not available for any 4-digit Speed
Dial System bin number.
2 - 76
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
DSS Console Chaining
DSS Console chaining allows an extension user with a DSS Console to chain to a
Speed Dialing number stored under a DSS Console key. The stored number dials out
(chains) to the initial call. This can, for example, simplify dialing when calling a
company with an Automated Attendant. You can program the bin for the company
number under one DSS Console key (e.g., #200) and the client extension number
under the other (e.g., #201). The DSS Console user can press the first key to call the
company, wait for the Automated Attendant to answer, then press the second key to
call the client (extension 400).
The DSS Console user can also chain to a Speed Dialing number dialed manually,
from a Programmable Function Key or a One-Touch Key.
Storing a Flash
To enhance compatibility with connected Centrex and PBX lines, a Speed Dialing bin
can have a stored Flash command. For example, storing 9 Flash 926 5400 causes
the system to dial 9, flash the line, and then dial 926 5400. The Flash can be stored
by the user from their telephone or by the system administrator during system
programming.
Using a Programmable Function Key
To streamline frequently-called numbers, a Speed Dialing Programmable Function
Key can also store a Speed Dialing bin number. When the extension user presses the
key, the telephone automatically dials out the stored number. This provides true
one-touch calling via a telephone function key.
Cursor Key Operation
By pressing the Right Cursor key, the user can access all directory menus. If the
terminal is not allowed access to Speed Dial and/or Telephone Book numbers or no
telephone numbers are programmed in those areas, they are skipped.
Speed Dial – Telephone Book
Enhancements
Speed Dial – Telephone Book feature added with Version 3000 or higher
software.
Speed Dial – Telephone Book is a part of the Speed Dialing system. A maximum of
100 Telephone Books are supported per system. Individual extensions can be
assigned up to two Telephone Books. Each Telephone Book can contain up to 300
alphabetical entries. Each of the 100 Telephone Books can have the 300 entries
separated into 20 different Telephone Book Groups providing a quicker search
capability to the user.
General Description Manual
2 - 77
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
For example, Telephone Book 1 represents equipment manufacturer ABC
Corporation. The ABC Corporation is divided into three groups; Sales, Service, and
Parts. When a user needs to search the ABC Corporation Telephone Book for a
Sales number, the search from all 300 entries in the ABC Corporation Telephone
Book can be narrowed to the entries in the Sales Group only.
Station Hunt
After calling a busy extension, a call immediately hunts to the next available member
of the Hunt Group (Department Group). The caller does not have to hang up and
place another Intercom call if the first extension called is unavailable.
Station Message Detail Recording
Enhancements
SMDR tracks when an extension transfers an active call to a trunk Version 3100
(3.10 or higher software required).
With Version 7000 or higher software, SMDR can record/print both system trunk
and internal calls. The V7000 Enhancement License (0036) and the SMDR
Feature License (0008) is required.
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) provides a record of both system trunk
calls and internal calls. Typically, the record outputs to a customer-provided printer,
terminal, or SMDR data collection device. SMDR allows you to monitor the usage at
each extension and trunk. This makes charge-back and traffic management easier.
SMDR provides the following options:
2 - 78

Abandoned Call Reporting

Blocked Call Reporting

Customized Date Format

Transferred Call Tracking

Data Call Tracking

Digit Counting

Digit Masking

Duration Monitoring

Extension Exclusion

PBX Call Reporting

Trunk Exclusion

Usage Summaries

Extension Name or Number
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Station Name Assignment – User Programmable
This feature allows a user to program the Station Name for their telephone extension
or any extension in the system. The name is displayed on the multiline terminal LCD
when an intercom or K-CCIS call is placed.
Station Relocation
Station Relocation allows a station to be moved from one location to another, without
having to reprogram the station data. The stations features and extension number
are the same after it is moved to the new location.
SV8100 Internal Router
The SV8100 Internal Router converged network appliance is an intelligent, all-in-one
networking solution for enterprises and service providers. It reduces costs by
simplifying the deployment, management, and security of converged voice, video,
and data networks. The Internal Router provides the following important functions for
converged networks:

T1 Wide Area Network (WAN) access router

Manual payload loop through the GUI

Security

VoIP

Quality of service

Call quality monitoring

Future-proof scalability
SV8100 NetLink
Enhancements
This feature added with Version 1100 (1.12 or higher).
With Version 4000 software, the failover process in a Netlink environment is
improved. When network communication is down, an alarm is sent to the
Attendant terminal informing of the communication error on the network.
Improvements also allow for a defined number of network outages per clock hour
before failing over.
With Version 4000 software, DT700 terminals connected via NAPT can be
registered to either the primary or a secondary system in a NetLink environment.
With Version 5000 software, NetLink Multi-SIP carrier has been added.
With Version 7000 or higher software, the SV8100 can recognize each system where the
DT700 extension(s) are connected and provide an Automatic Route Selection COS
based on the System (System ID) when using NetLink.
General Description Manual
2 - 79
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
The NetLink feature allows up to 16 sites to be linked together over a Data
Communication IP NetLink that allows Remote Sites to have the same service
features as the main site acting as one system. Systems can be installed separately
in the same building or in remote offices connected via a qualified IP network.
With NetLink, the maximum system capacity still applies (200 Trunks and 512
Stations), but the ports can be distributed between sites using an SV8100 CHS2U-US
chassis at each location.
Each site requires a PZ-(X)IPLA/IPLB daughter board and a PZ-ME50-US Memory
Expansion daughter board installed on its CD-CP00-US blade. The CD-CP00-US
blade at each Remote Site must have the same system data as the Main Site
CD-CP00-US blade. The Main Site automatically uploads the system data to Remote
Sites anytime the data is changed.
The main site requires a proper LK-SYS-NETLINKX-LIC license for each remote site.
When communication failure occurs between the Main Site and any Remote Site, The
Main Site CD-CP00-US blade automatically changes to survival mode and operates
as a stand-alone system. If multiple Remote Sites are installed, a Remote Site can be
assigned as a temporary Main Site to control remaining connected sites.
NetLink Multi-SIP Carrier
The Version 5000 enhancement enables multiple SIP Trunk carriers to be
utilized when NetLink is configured.
The operation of SIP Trunk is described as follows when an existing Version
4000 (V4.01 or lower) NetLink system is configured. If the secondary system
calls for using a SIP Trunk a total of three DSPs are required. One DSP from
the secondary and two DSPs from the Primary system. Also, only 32 Register
ID’s are available which are programmed in the Primary system.
SV8100 PoE Gigabit Switch
The NEC PoE Gigabit Switch card (GSWU) is a fully managed switch which brings
gigabit speeds to users while adding a whole new level of intelligence and security to
networks.
The eight 10/100/1000 Mbps ports enable users to take advantage of the Gigabit
Ethernet interfaces. The NEC PoE Gigabit Switch Card supports the UNIVERGE
SV8100 and SV8300 systems.
All user ports can support up to Gigabit Ethernet and may support the primary Layer 2
protocols also, with an emphasis on QoS features such as 802.1p and Diffserv.
The CD-ETIA blade has eight RJ45 ports for 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and
1000Base-T along the front. The CD-ETIA design is based on one card and one
software build. However, all the cards in the system are managed as a Master/Slave
configuration. The Master provides full distributed Layer 2 management to all
Ethernet Switch cards in the system.
2 - 80
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
The CD-ETIA can be a standalone blade providing 8 Gigabit Ethernet PoE ports.
However, the real advantage with this blade is that additional blades can be “stacked”
by external “daisy chain” connections to provide up to 76 contiguous ports (all on the
same managed domain/network). Below are the primary features of the card set.
Switches, unlike hubs, use microsegmentation to create collision domains, one per
connected segment. This way, only the Ethernet devices which are directly connected
via a point-to-point link, or directly connected hubs are contending for the medium.
By eliminating collisions, full-duplex point-to-point connections on the switch are
possible.
When multiple blades requiring Ethernet data connections are installed in a
UNIVERGE SV8100 chassis, the CD-ETIA can provide a neat and simple installation.
The CD-ETIA is an in-skin, fast Ethernet switching hub unit that provides the following
services:

Eight 10/100/1000 Gigabit Ethernet ports

PoE
802.3af compliant, supplies up to IEEE standard maximum 15.4W on eight 10/
100/1000 ports Link/ACT, POE System

Simplified QoS management using 802.1p, Diffserv or ToS traffic prioritization
specifications

Granular security and QoS implementation

802.1Q based VLANs enable segmentation of networks for improved
performance and security

VLAN
Port Based and 802.1Q Tag-based VLANS Management VLAN

Automatic configuration of VLANs across multiple switches through GVRP/
GARP

Auto MDI/MDIX

Port Mirroring
Traffic on a port can be mirrored to another port for analysis with a network
analyzer

Firmware Upgrade

Built in Web UI for easy browser-based configuration (HTTP)

Rate Limiting

Ingress Policer

Egress rate control
General Description Manual
2 - 81
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
SV8100 UC Desktop Suite Applications
Enhancements
UC Desktop Applications Version 2.0.0.0 or higher with main CPU software
Version 2000 or higher provides the following enhancements:

Support for the CallTo hyperlink within Microsoft Applications or web pages. Clicking
a CallTo link will initiate a call to the number via the Desktop Application.

DNIS display for incoming calls to the Desktop station when DNIS information is
provided.

IP Softphone support for wide band codec (G.722).

Notification by Windows toast in the system tray for missed calls and new InMail
voice messages.

SIP/Audio RTP encryption for IP Softphone.

Support for generic USB handsets for the IP Softphone.

The toolbar has a new icon to bring up the phone image for an IP Softphone.

The ability to choose Handset or Headset for incoming and outgoing calls.

Shared Services is enhanced to include Presence. Presence indicates the
Availability Status, Location, Expected Return Date and Time, Forward Settings for
the users phone, and Special Instructions.

Outlook Add-In is enhanced to also include the ability to transfer or conference from
the Outlook Contacts Folder.

Highlight Dial – Highlight a phone number within any Windows application and have
it automatically dialed by the Desktop Application.

Recalled calls to a Desktop Station show as recalled calls instead of a new ringing
call.
The same user name and password can be assigned to IP Multiline Station,
MH240 and Desktop ports when automatic or manual registration is used (Version
3000 or higher software).
UC Desktop Applications Version 3.5.0.0 or higher provides the following
enhancements:
2 - 82

Answering Center – The Answering Center module supports additional features to be
utilized with the Attendant Module to provide efficient call handling in a multi-tenant
environment.

Presence Enhancements – Customized Presence states and the ability to schedule
Presence events.

Enhanced Outlook Integration – A Presence State can be associated with an Outlook
Calendar Appointment. Telephone numbers from an Outlook Contact can be added
to the Desktop Speed Dial list.

Mobility Features – Provides the user the ability to view and set the Presence status
and call forwarding rules while out of the office.

Integration with the Salesforce.com website.

TSP enhancements for additional CRM support.
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Enhancements (Continued)

Attendant like features without Shared Services – The Desktop Client can have the
full function of Window mode with the DSS/BLF panel without shared services similar
to the way it worked in 1.0. The DSS/BLF panel will not show all devices in the
system, but will show DSS/BLFs that are programmed on a physical button on the
terminal or DSS console attached to the terminal.
UC Desktop Applications Version 3.6.0.0 or higher supports:

Microsoft Windows 7 (32- and 64-bit platforms).

Parked Calls can be monitored in the Active Call list.
With Version 4000 or higher software, SOAI and 3rd Party CTI can be used at the
same time in the system. This allows systems at Version 4000 or higher to have
Desktop Applications and DTPlusware or UCB and DTPlusware.
UC Desktop Applications Version 3.7.0.0 software provides the following
enhancements (Version 5000 or higher system software is required):

Support for systems that have migrated from the UX5000 to the SV8100.

Shared Services is supported on 64-bit Windows 7.

Call Forward Both Ring can be set from Desktop via the toolbar or from a Presence
State.

Don't Change Forwarding is an Phone Settings option when setting a Presence
State.
In previous versions of software, when a 3rd party CTI server has already been
connected with a main device (when 3rd party CTI is used) other 3rd party CTI
devices cannot connect to the main device.
With Version 5000 or higher CPU software, the IP Address of the CTI server
currently connected is displayed in Program (20-23-06).
UC Desktop Applications Version 4.0.0.0 software provides the following
enhancements (Version 5000 or higher system software is required):

New and improved Graphical User Interface (GUI) with new icons, BLF button size
options, Presence animation, Presence State Indicator relocated, BLF Active Call
Detail for other users and reformatted columns and menus.

Collaboration support for Windows 7 via the Data Conference Module for Chat,
Application Sharing and Video. Data Conference requires an Enhancement Bundle
license (5303) and is not available in the Deskset Only configuration.

Group Phone Messaging – adds the ability to send a phone message to multiple
recipients.

Group Quick Messaging – adds the ability to send a quick message to multiple
recipients.

Name Extraction – Through the O&M interface the Desktop Application can retrieve
the extension names from Program 15-01 and include this value as part of each
entry in the Directory.
General Description Manual
2 - 83
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Enhancements (Continued)

InACD Client – From the Desktop Application a user can Login, Log Out, Wrap Up,
go into Off Duty, view real time Queue statistics, monitor ACD states of other agents
and initiate Emergency Call functions.


Part number 670184 – LK-DT Upgrade 4.0-LIC license (license code 5309 in Program 1050-01) and SV8100 system software Version 5.01 or higher is required for the InACD Agent
capability within Desktop.
Mobility – From a web browser on a PC or mobile device, mobile users can view and
set presence status and call forwarding options while away from the office.

Part number 670981 – LK-SYS-Mobile Presence-LIC license (license code 5311 in Program
10-50-01) and SV8100 system software Version 5.01 or higher is required for Mobile
Presence.

InServer Blade – The InServer is an in-skin blade for the SV8100 designed to be an
application server for several of the external applications available for the SV8100
product line. Initially, the InServer will come pre-installed with Windows Embedded
Standard OS and will support the setup and deployment of the NEC Desktop Suite
and InACD MIS.

With the InServer Blade, installation is made easier by allowing the technician to
direct users to a URL where software files with preconfigured settings that
automatically populate the configuration fields within the desktop can be
downloaded.
SV8100 UC Desktop Suite Applications Version 5.0.0.0 software provides the
following enhancements (Version 7000 or higher system software is required):

Park Enhancement – monitoring of all 64 park orbits in the system, one-click park,
drag and drop park, valet park.

InMail Integration with message count, message playback, archive, delete or dial
number associated with message.

Profile Sharing – Shared Services is enhanced to allow users to create and share
profiles consisting of commonly used preferences and configurations.

Salesforce.com Enhancement – Screen Pop support for Salesforce.com
Professional Edition.

Integration Toolkit – A Developers Toolkit allowing users to develop interfaces
integrating third-party applications with the Desktop Suite.

BLF Custom Layout – Drag and Drop BLFs in a custom order if the user prefers
something other than extension or name order.

Instant Messenger (IM) – real time instant messaging between Desktop users with
session history.
The SV8100 UC Desktop Suite Applications allows users to control their SV8100
terminal from their PC (Deskset mode) or the PC can become their SV8100 terminal
(SP310 – IP Soft Phone Mode).
2 - 84
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Through licensing control and user selection, the application can be tailored to meet
the needs of a variety of end users. Additional utilities are provided as part of the
Desktop Application suite:

Answering Center – with UC Desktop Applications Version 3.5.0.0 or higher,
the Answering Center supports additional features to be utilized with the
Attendant Module to provide efficient call handling in a multi-tenant
environment. For example, if a receptionist is required to answer calls for a
variety of different businesses, the Answering Center module will identify the
company being called and display information on the receptionist’s screen to
assist with handling the call.
Part number 670940 – LK-DT CRM Integration-LIC license (license code 5310 in
Program 10-50-01) and SV8100 system software Version 3100 or higher is required for
Answering Center.


Configuration Wizard – steps the user through the process of providing the
settings that are required to start the desktop application.

Outlook Add-In – allows the user to dial out, end call and perform screen pops
through the Contacts folder within Microsoft Outlook. With UC Desktop
Applications Version 2.0.0.0 and main CPU software Version 2500 or higher,
Outlook Add-In also allows the user to perform Conference and Transfer from
the Contacts folder.
With UC Desktop Applications Version 3.5.0.0 or higher, the Outlook
integration is enhanced to include the ability to associate a Presence State with
an Outlook Calendar Appointment, and to add telephone numbers from an
Outlook Contact to the Desktop Speed Dial list.
Part number 670939 – LK-DT Upgrade 3.0-LIC license (license code 5309 in Program
10-50-01) and SV8100 system software Version 3100 is required for Presence Setting from
Outlook Calendar.


Salesforce.com adaptor – with UC Desktop Applications Version 3.5.0.0 or
higher, the Salesforce.com provides access to the following operations through
the Salesforce.com interface:

Call contact phone number

Dial phone number directly

Answer incoming call

End active call

Hold active call

Retrieve a Held call

Transfer active call
Additionally, with an Enterprise or Unlimited account, the Salesforce integration
module also provides the following feature:

Pop contact on incoming call that matches phone number.
With UC Desktop Suite Version 5.0.0.0 or higher, Salesforce.com screen pops
are also supported with the Professional edition.
General Description Manual
2 - 85
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
The Salesforce.com integration module requires a Salesforce.com Professional,
Enterprise, or Unlimited Edition account. The integration module is compatible
with the following browsers: Internet Explorer 8 or later and Firefox 3.6. Firefox 4
is not currently supported.


Part number 670940 – LK-DT CRM Integration-LIC license (license code 5310 in
Program 10-50-01) and SV8100 system software Version 3100 are required for
Salesforce.com integration.
Telephony Service Provider (TSP) – with UC Desktop Applications Version
3.5.0.0 or higher, the 1st Party TSP installed with Desktop supports additional
functionality such as transfer, conference, hold and unhold.

Part number 670940 – LK-DT CRM Integration-LIC license (license code 5310 in
Program 10-50-01) and SV8100 system software Version 3100 are required for Time
Matters integration.

Video Test Tool – Helps verify that the SP310 can communicate with and use
the video camera connected to the PC.

Integration Toolkit – The Desktop Suite has the ability to support integration with
a variety of popular third-party CRM applications. These integrations typically
allow the third-party software to dial numbers stored within the application and
screen pop entries based upon Caller ID recognition. However, many
companies use CRMs (Customer Resource Management) packages that are
industry-specific or, in some cases, internally developed.
In order to provide another means to integrate with third-party applications, the
Integration Developer’s Toolkit allows users to develop their own interface to the
Desktop Suite.

Part number 670940 – LK-DT CRM Integration-LIC license (license code 5310 in
Program 10-50-01) and SV8100 system software Version 7000 are required for the
Integration Toolkit.
Desktop Client
The Desktop Client enhances the operation of the NEC digital telephone set by
providing easy access to common, and not so common, UNIVERGE SV8100 voice
control features. This software application provides a very intuitive user interface that
can be conveniently located at the top or bottom of the PC screen. The user interface
can even "shrink" into the edge of the screen and become visible when a call arrives,
or when the user moves the mouse to the edge of the display.
In addition to quick access to these SV8100 features, the Desktop Client provides a
call log for easy viewing of recent received, missed, or made calls – just like your cell
phone. It also includes a directory to keep your commonly dialed numbers close at
hand, and optional features like voice recording, personal greeting, and screen pops
using Microsoft Outlook, ACT! 2005 or higher, Goldmine 6.7 or higher,
Salesforce.com, or Time Matters.

2 - 86
Part number 670940 – LK-DT CRM Integration-LIC license (license code 5310 in Program 1050-01) and SV8100 system software Version 3100 are required for Salesforce.com and Time
Matters integration.
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
With UC Desktop Application Version 4.0.0.0 or higher, Desktop Users that are also
ACD agents can perform ACD functions from within the Desktop Application. ACD
functions included in the Desktop Application are Login, Logout, Off Duty, Wrap Up,
view Agent Monitor, and view Queue Monitor.

Part number 670184 – LK-DT Upgrade 4.0-LIC license (license code 5309 in Program 10-5001) and SV8100 system software Version 5.01 or higher is required for the InACD Agent
capability within Desktop.
Desktop Client has the following main components:

SV8100 UC Desktop Suite Applications Software
This application runs on a PC and provides the PC-based GUI (Graphical User
Interface) and features.

Headset (Optional)
The headset can be plugged into the multiline telephone and used when making
or receiving calls with the Desktop Client. Desktop Client runs on a PC and
communicates with the UNIVERGE SV8100 through TCP/IP. The Desktop
Client can be run for a physical deskset station or a softphone station. When
calls come into the station, the Desktop Client displays it on the PC, and
provides several features that allow the user to handle the call quickly. Desktop
Client can be minimized to run in the background and pop to the front when call
activity occurs. Calls can then be handled using either the keyboard or the
mouse. The user speaks to the caller through the telephone handset, headset,
or speakerphone of the multiline telephone the application is running on, or
through a USB handset or headset connected to PC running the softphone.
SV8100/SV8300 Terminals
Enhancements
With Version 3000 or higher system software, the appropriate line key page
automatically displays for incoming calls on the DTL-8LD-1 (DESI-Less) and
ITL-320C-1 terminals.
The SV8100/SV8300 is a full-featured IP based communications system providing a
rich feature set with pure Voice over IP (VoIP) communications, across corporate
Local and Wide Area Networks (LAN and WAN).
The DT700 series telephones provide a converged infrastructure at the desktop, with
a 10Base-T/100Base-TX connection to the LAN and built-in hub for a PC connection
to the telephone itself. The system can provide peer-to-peer connections between the
DT700 series telephones with voice compression, offering existing IP telephone
features with an enhanced user interface. On the WAN side, the system can provide
peer-to-peer connections over IP networks with the voice compression, on CCIS over
IP or Remote Unit over IP.

Remote Unit over IP is available only for the SV8300.
General Description Manual
2 - 87
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
The SV8100/SV8300 can provide legacy line/trunk interfaces to support the existing
Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) based infrastructure, such as analog telephones,
digital telephones (DT300 series), analog networks and digital networks (T1/E1,
ISDN, etc.).
Synchronous Ringing
Synchronous Ringing synchronizes CO/PBX incoming ringing with the incoming
ringing pattern from a Central Office.
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
The T1/PRI Interface gives the system T1 trunking ability. This blade uses a single
universal slot and provides up to 24 trunk circuits. In additional to providing
digital-quality trunking, the T1/PRI Interface allows you to have maximum trunking
ability with fewer blades. This in turn makes more universal slots available for other
functions.
You can program each T1/PRI for any combination of the following trunks:

CO loop start

CO ground start

Direct Inward Dialing

Tie lines [Two-wire (four-lead) type 1 tie lines (FIC TL11M) only].
The CD-PRTA blade uses the first block of 24 consecutive trunks. For example, if you
have CD-4COTB with PZ-4COTF installed for trunks 1~8, the T1/PRI Interface
automatically uses trunks 9~32. If you have CD-4COTB with PZ-4COTF installed for
trunks 1~8 and 17~24, the T1/PRI uses trunks 25~48. The T1/PRI Interface cannot
use trunks 9~16 (even if available) since they are not part of a consecutive block of 24
trunks. Each T1/PRI requires that 24 consecutive ports be available in the system
even if not all the ports are used, otherwise the blade does not function.
The CD-PRTA can be programmed as a 4/8/12/16/20/24 port Fractional T1PRI.
ANI/DNIS Compatibility
The system is compatible with Telco T1 Automatic Number Identification (ANI) and
Dialed Number Information Service (DNIS) services. A compliment to Caller ID
service, ANI/DNIS Compatibility provides:
2 - 88

Receive Format

Flexible Routing

Route According to DID Translation Table or Speed Dial Bins
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
ANI/DNIS Data Displayed as Caller ID Data

Data Error and Unanswered Call Handling
If a call cannot be completed, send it to a predetermined Ring Group or play
supervisory tones to the caller.
Tandem Ringing
Tandem Ringing allows an extension user to have two telephones with one telephone
number. For example, extension 105 (the master telephone) sets Tandem Ringing
with extension 106. When extension 105 receives an incoming call, both extensions
105 and 106 ring. Callers dial the master extension number (extension 105 in this
example). When either the master telephone or slave telephone is in use, the other
telephone cannot be used for outgoing calls or incoming calls.
A multiline terminal must be paired with a single line telephone. It cannot be paired
with another multiline terminal.
A single line telephone must be paired with another single line telephone. It cannot
be paired with a multiline telephone.
Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference)
Tandem Trunking allows an extension user to join two outside callers in a
Trunk-to-Trunk Conference. The extension user can then drop out of the call, leaving
the trunks in an Unsupervised Conference. The extension user that established the
conference is not part of the conversation. The conference continues until either
outside party hangs up. The extension user that set up the conference can end the
tandem call anytime.
The number of simultaneous conference calls is limited by the number of conference
circuits in the system. The maximum number of conference calls cannot exceed the
limits defined below:
The CD-CP00-US provides two blocks of 32 conference circuits, allowing each block
to have any number of conferences with any number of internal or external parties
conferenced as long as the total number of conference channels used does not
exceed 32.
Tandem Trunking could help an office manager put two outside sales people in touch.
The office manager could:

Answer a call from one salesperson

Place a call to the second salesperson

Set up the Trunk-to-Trunk Conference

Drop out of the call
The office manager could terminate the conference anytime.
General Description Manual
2 - 89
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Four methods for Tandem Trunking are available:

Method A – Tandem Trunking from Conference

Method B – Tandem Trunking with Transfer Key

Method C – Automatic Tandem Trunking on Hang Up

Method D – Automatic Tandem Trunking Setup to Speed Dial Number
Trunk Continue/Disconnect Codes Added
Software enhances the forced trunk release option with the Tandem Trunking and
DISA features. Users can be allowed to use a Continue or Disconnect service code.
The Continue service code extends the conversation a programmed time. If the user
enters the Disconnect service code, the call is disconnected immediately.
TAPI Compatibility
Enhancements
With Version 4000 or higher software, SOAI and 3rd Party CTI can be used at the
same time in the system. This allows systems at Version 4000 or higher to have
Desktop Applications and DTPlusware or UCB and DTPlusware.
The system has Telephony Applications Programming Interface (TAPI) compatibility
that provides:

Reduced TAPI Feature set

Caller ID data to the PC for data base lookups and screen pops

Telephone control (off-hook, on-hook and dialing)
The 1st-Party TAPI Ethernet driver provides an interface that allows the user
personalized control of the telephone system from a desktop or laptop PC when used
in conjunction with a TAPI-compliant application. The telephone system and PC are
connected by installing an adapter on the telephone multiline terminal, allowing the
PC user to access sophisticated communications services via the telephone lines.
Tone Override
The multiline terminal user that calls a busy station and receives a call waiting tone
can generate a Tone Override that is heard by the originator and busy station. The
busy station user can place the existing call on hold to answer the Override.
Traffic Reports
The system can send data to a PC connected to the UNIVERGE SV8100. The
telephone call traffic data for each extension is captured for use with the Station
Message Detail Recording (SMDR) feature.
2 - 90
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Call Traffic
The total of outgoing call frequency, outgoing call duration, incoming call frequency,
answer frequency, incoming call duration, ringing duration for each line and
extension, and abandon call frequency for each line is logged. The total of incoming
calls, answer frequency, call duration for each line and extension, and abandon call
frequency of each line is logged and the data is outputted to the PC. The system
totals the hour, day, week, and month for each terminal and trunk number. This
information is used by the SMDR feature. The extension which is totaled is
determined by system programming. The system outputs this data to the PC for the
total period.
Transfer
Transfer permits an extension user to send an active Intercom or outside call to any
other extension in the system. With Transfer, any extension user can quickly send a
call to the desired co-worker. A call a user transfers, automatically recalls if not picked
up at the destination extension. This assures that users do not lose or inadvertently
abandon their transfers. While a transferred call is ringing an extension the system
can optionally play ringback tone or Music on Hold to the caller.
The system allows the following transfers:

Screened

Unscreened

Extension (Department) Groups

Without Holding
Automatic On-Hook Transfer Operation
With Automatic On-Hook Transfer, a Transfer goes through as soon as the
transferring user hangs up. Automatic On-Hook Transfer makes transferring calls
easier.
Prevent Recall of Transferred Call
The Class of Service program allows you to prevent a Transferred call from recalling
the originating extension if the call is not answered.
Transfer Call into Conference/Existing Call
This feature allows either a multiline terminal or single line telephone to Barge-In to
transfer a call to an existing call. This call can be a 2-party call, a Conference call, or a
Barge-In Conference. The system allows Intercom and trunk calls to be transferred
into a Conference call.
General Description Manual
2 - 91
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Transfer to Trunk Ring Group Available
It is possible to transfer a trunk call to the trunk ring group defined in Program
22-05-01: Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment. The trunk then rings the defined
extensions for the ring group.
This also allows the transferred call to ring over the External Paging (Program 31-05:
Universal Night Answer/Ring Over Page) so that an employee can answer the call
from any available telephone.
Transfer Key Can Place Call on Hold
While on a call, you can press the Transfer key to place the call on hold.
Trunk Group Routing
Trunk Group Routing sets outbound call routing options for users that dial the Trunk
Group Routing code (9) for trunk calls. Trunk Group Routing routes calls in the order
specified by system programming. If a user dials 9 and all trunks in the first group are
busy, the system may route the call to another group.
When setting up your system, Trunk Group Routing helps you minimize the expense
of toll calls. For example, if your system has outbound WATS lines, OCC lines and
DDD lines, use Trunk Group Routing to route calls to the WATS lines first.
There are 100 available Trunk Groups and 100 Routes.
Outbound Call
WATS
Least Expensive
OCC
Moderately
Expensive
DDD
Most Expensive
First Choice
Second Choice
Third Choice
Trunk Groups
Trunk Groups let you optimize trunk usage for incoming and outgoing calls. Each
group can be accessed by an Access Code plus the group number. There are 100
available Trunk Groups and you set the access order in trunk group programming.
Using Call Appearance (CAP) Keys gives an extension user more available function
keys, since the user does not need a separate line key for each trunk.
Like Trunk Group Routing, Trunk Groups help you minimize the expense of toll calls.
For example, if your system has outbound WATS lines, OCC lines and DDD lines,
program the trunk group to route to the WATS lines first.
2 - 92
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Priority
Type of Trunk
1
WATS
2
OCC
3
DDD
Trunk Queuing/Camp-On
Trunk Queuing permits an extension user to queue (wait in line) on hook for a busy
trunk or trunk group to become free. The system recalls the queued extension as
soon as the trunk is available. The user does not have to manually retry the trunk
later. Trunk Queuing lets the caller know when the call can go through. If the
extension user does not answer the Trunk Queuing ring, the system cancels the
queue request.
With Trunk Camp-On, an extension user can queue (wait in line) Off-Hook for a busy
trunk or trunk group to become free. The caller connects to the trunk when the trunk
becomes free. As with Trunk Queuing, the user does not have to manually retry the
trunk later.
Any number of extensions may simultaneously queue or Camp On for the same trunk
or trunk group. When a trunk becomes free, the system connects the extensions in
the order that the requests were left.
UCB (Unified Communications for Business)
Enhancements
This feature added with Version 1100 (1.10 or higher).
UCB Fax is supported with UCB software Version 5.00SP2.
UCB functionality has been enhanced with SV8100 Version 5000, UCB 5.1 and
TSP 4.00 or higher software.

Virtual Extensions are supported for Queues (Agent and Operator) and pilot
numbers (Voice Mail, Hold, & Executive Conference).

Mobile Extension is supported in the same system as UCB.

Application keys are used instead of Blank keys when programming the Dterm Keys
for UCB.

The TSP and UCB have been enhanced to limit when the TSP requires a reset and
how it can be reset.
In previous versions of software, when a 3rd party CTI server has already been
connected with a main device (when 3rd party CTI is used) other 3rd party CTI
devices cannot connect to the main device.
With Version 5000 or higher CPU software, the IP Address of the CTI server
currently connected is displayed in Program (20-23-06).
General Description Manual
2 - 93
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
UCB is a modular multimedia Contact Center solution providing skills-based routing
(SBR) and blending customer contacts using Telephone, Email, Web Callback, Web
Chat, Voicemail and Fax. UCB provides much more than a conventional Automatic
Call Distribution system.
UCB is licensed according to the modules required by the customer, and the number
of concurrent users. For specific information regarding each module, refer to the
separate product manuals. These manuals are common for all NEC platforms, and
the feature restrictions described in the document may limit availability of some
features for installations on the SV8100 telephone system.
Telephone calls (incoming DIT, ANA, DID, CO, or ring Transfer) terminate to a
programmed queue. Each queue is programmed as an virtual extension so the
number of queues depends on the total number of configured devices in the SV8100
system. A maximum of 512 extensions are supported, and the user must remember
to count voicemail ports and Q-announce ports. Any agent can take calls from any
queue, based on customer Caller ID, agent skills, or routing choices made using the
UCB graphical user interface (GUI) administration tool. UCB delivers the incoming
call either to the agent that has been idle the longest or in accordance with a
programmed preference level. Consideration can be made for concurrent activity by
the agent on other medias (for example, queue Telephone calls can be blocked when
the agent is currently engaged in a Web Chat with another customer).
Refer to the Q-Control product manual for additional information.
Call Processing
Call Processing adds the following features to UCB:

Abandoned Call Search

Call Transfer to ACD Queue

Queuing

Pilot Numbers
Agent and Supervisor Functions
Agent and Supervisor Functions add the following to UCB:
2 - 94

Assistance

Break Mode

Work Mode

Logon/Logoff

Non-ACD Call

Headset Answer/Release

Headset Volume Control

Monitoring (Barge-In)
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Announcement Function
There are no Default announcements, Progress announcements, or Position in
Queue announcements for the UCB. Each announcement can be recorded
either using the Administrator application audio editor with audio recorded from
the telephone or PC microphone or by importing it from .WAV or .VOX files.
Optimum recording settings for studio recordings are available in the online
help. Each announcement can be used by any queue. Each announcement
can be edited using the Administrator GUI .WAV editor to delete or paste audio
content. All announcements are stored in the UCB internal database.
Voicemail Function
User mailboxes are assigned to a mailbox class that defines a maximum
number of new, saved, and deleted messages that the mailbox can contain and
the number of days before purging each type of message.
There are Company and User mailboxes. The company mailbox defines the
main greeting, company schedule, and available default one touch keys. User
mailboxes are for individuals and can have customized settings that can be
changed anytime from the Administrator GUI, user computer desktop, or the
telephone interface.
The following have settings that can be customized:

Profiles

Distribution Lists

Schedule

One-Touch Keys
InUCB Blade
InUCB is a Server Blade (CD-SVRU) with the UCB (Unified Communication for
Business) installed with reduced capacities and functionalities. The CD-SVRU
blade can be installed in any vacant slot within the SV8100. SV8100 Version
5000, UCB 5.1, and TSP 4.00 or higher software required.
UM8000 Mail
The UM8000 Mail voice mail system, using the UNIVERGE SV8100 system and a
Local Area Network, provide Unified Messaging services for voice, fax and email
messages with access at either the desktop PC or the telephone. Unified Messaging
lets the PC control telephone calls and information about each inbound and outbound
call.
Automated Attendant automatically answers the system incoming calls. After listening
to a customized message, an outside caller can dial a system extension or use Voice
Mail.
General Description Manual
2 - 95
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Integrated Voice Mail enhances the telephone system with the following features:

Expanded Schedule

Call Forwarding to Voice Mail

Leaving a Message

Transferring to Voice Mail

Live Record

Live Monitor

Voice Mail Overflow

Voice Mail Caller ID

Quick Transfer to Voice Mail
Optional UM8000 Mail TeLANophy Module Features

Text-to-Speech Using Nuance® RealSpeak™

ViewMail® with Live Record Module

ViewFax®

ViewCall® Plus

Hospitality Package

Additional Hospitality Languages

Networking

Multilingual Support
Supported Languages:
ar = Argentinean
au = Australian English
ca = Catalan Spanish
ct = Cantonese Chinese
de = German
dk = Danish
ed = Madrid Spanish
es = Mexican Spanish
fc = Canadian French
fr = Parisian French
he = Hebrew
it = Italian

2 - 96
ja = Japanese (hospitality only)
la = Latin America Spanish
md = Mandarin Chinese
nl = Dutch
nz = New Zealand English
pi = Iberian Portuguese
pt = Portuguese
se = Swedish
uk = UK English
us = US English
ru = Russian
EMail Integration
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
uMobility
Enhancements
This feature added with Version 3000.
The uMobility system is designed to enhance the mobile user’s experience by
bringing features and functionality from office or residential services right to the smart
phone. The uMobility system allows the user to:

Answer the office desktop telephone directly from your smart phone – anytime,
anywhere.

Make calls from the smart phone that uses your office telephone system’s
default number.

Enjoy greatly improved cellular phone coverage while inside the office.

Never miss an important call again while away from your desk.

Talk on the smart phone and not use any cellular network minutes when in a
Wi-Fi hotspot, at the office, at home or at a public hotspot (VPN required).

Access work voice mail directly from your smart phone.

Stop juggling between the cell phone and the office desktop telephone or home
telephone.
The uMC Server is the gateway for uMobility mobile devices to access the SV8100
system. It also knows when the mobile device is in the Wi-Fi or Cellular domain and
will direct CO and internal calls to the mobile device using the appropriate method.
Unicast/Multicast Paging Mode
Enhancements
This feature added with Version 3000.
With Version 3000 or higher software the IP terminals (DT7XX) can now receive an
Internal Page via a Unicast or Multicast packet based upon system programming.
This feature allows IP terminals (DT7XX) to be assigned to Unicast Mode, Multicast
Mode, or Auto. Prior to Version 3000, Unicast paging was not an available option.
When the phone is set to Unicast Mode the internal paging is sent to the phone via a
Unicast Packet.
When the phone is set to Multicast Mode the internal page is sent to the phone via a
Multicast Packet.
General Description Manual
2 - 97
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
When the phone is set to Auto, the internal page is sent to the phone either by
Multicast or Unicast based on the subnet of the IP station. If the DT7XX terminal is in
the same subnet as the IPLA then it will receive the Internal Page via a Multicast
Packet. If the DT7XX terminal is in a different subnet than the IPLA the DT7XX will
receive the Internal Page via a Unicast Packet.
When phones are set to receive Unicast packets the IPLA will send a separate RTP
stream to each phone that is set to receive the page. E.g. If there are five DT7XX IP
phones in the page group and they are all set to Unicast Page Mode the IPLA will
send five separate RTP streams utilizing five DSP resources.
When the phones are set to receive Multicast packets the IPLA will send one RTP
stream. Multicast is a protocol that allows one device to communicate to multiple
devices without the need to stream to the individual end point. E.g. If there are five
DT7XX IP phones in the page group that are set to Multicast Mode, the IPLA will send
one RTP stream utilizing only one DSP resource.
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
With Uniform Call Distribution (UCD), an extension user can call an idle extension in a
programmed UCD Group (Department Group – 64 Department Groups available) by
dialing the group pilot number. For example, this would let a caller dial the Sales
department just by knowing the Sales department pilot number. The caller would not
have to know any Sales department extension numbers.
User Log Out/Log In
An extension user can log out and log in to a UCD (Department) group. By logging
out, the user removes their extension from the group. Once logged out, UCD
(Department Calling) bypasses their extension. When they log back in, UCD
(Department Calling) routes to their extension normally. All users can dial a code to
log in or log out of their UCD (Department Calling) Group. A multiline terminal can
optionally have a function key programmed for one-button log in and log out.
Enhanced Hunting
UCD (Department Calling) is enhanced with expanded hunting abilities. Hunting
defines how calls to a UCD (Department Group) pilot number cycle through the
members of the group. The hunting choices are:
2 - 98

Busy

Not Answered

Busy or Not Answered
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
If all members of the UCD (Department) group are busy, an incoming or transferred
call to the group pilot number queues for an available member. Each group has a
queue that can hold any number of waiting calls. If a display telephone is waiting in
queue, the user sees: WAITING (group name). If a transferred call in queue is an
outside call, and the system has a DSP daughter board installed with the VRS
compact flash, the queued caller hears, “Please hold on. All lines are busy. Your call
will be answered when a line becomes free.”
The VRS can also transfer calls to UCD (Department) groups. Refer to the Voice
Response System (VRS) on page 2-111 feature for more information on setting up the
VRS.
The system prevents hunting to a UCD (Department) group extension if it is:

Busy on a call

In Do Not Disturb

Call Forwarded

Logged Out
Uniform Numbering Network
Uniform Numbering Network allows multiple or compatible systems to be connected
in a network using Tie Lines. A station user can dial a system number and a station
number (open numbering) or dial the station number only (closed numbering) to
access any station. When the calling and called systems are not directly connected,
several Tie Lines may be accessed to route the call. Each system extends the call to
the next system until the final destination is reached. Networking provides a
seamless connection of multiple systems into a single “virtual” communications
system using Tie Lines with a unified numbering plan. Networking allows many
companies to connect their telephone systems so they appear as one. An extension
user in the network can easily dial another extension or transfer a call in the
Networking System. Calls are passed from network node to network node using a
protocol that contains information about the source of the call, the type of call and the
destination of the call.
General Description Manual
2 - 99
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Flexible Network Routing
Use network routes to set up single-channel networking between many separate
systems – or use multiple networking channels per system for greater network
performance. Data tables in the system program define the routing for each extension
in each network node. These tables are easily customized to meet the requirements
of each networking configuration. Users may place an intercom call or transfer a call
to any extension at any location by dialing an extension number. The system analyzes
each extension number received and determines how to route the call to its final
destination. The feature which handles this route selection is called Flexible Routing
(F-Routing). F-Routing also can select alternate routes to the destination extension if
the primary destination is busy. Up to 120 routes are available for networking. After an
extension number is dialed, the system checks the routing, accesses the assigned
trunk group and places the call. Each extension is assigned a route or routes that
decide which trunk group to access and any modified dialed data if required.
Universal Slots
Enhancements
SV8100 Version 2000 software now supports a 3-slot 9.5” chassis.
This feature added with Version 2000 software.
The SV8100 now supports a 3-slot 9.5” base chassis and a 3-slot 9.5" expansion
chassis that can be combined to make a 6-slot chassis.
This feature added with Version 3000 software.
The SV8100 now supports two CD-LTA (Combo) blades installed in a single 9.5"
Base chassis, a total of eight CD-LTA's in a four chassis system and 23 in a
networked system. The PZ-ME50 is required for this configuration.
This feature added with Version 3000.
The UNIVERGE SV8100 has six universal slots, and up to four cabinets can be
installed. The system uses the same chassis for the Controlling and Expansion and
can support up to 24 Universal Slots.
Up to four combined CHS2U B-US/CHS2U E (3-Slot Base/3-Slot Expansion) or
CHS2U-US (6-Slot) chassis can be connected locally to reach the system’s maximum
port capacity.
EXAMPLE:
0 CHS2U-US (19” Chassis) & 4 CHS2U B-US/CHS2U E (9.5” Base Chassis/9.5”
Expansion Chassis)
1 CHS2U-US (19” Chassis) & 3 CHS2U B-US/CHS2U E (9.5” Base Chassis/9.5”
Expansion Chassis)
2 CHS2U-US (19” Chassis) & 2 CHS2U B-US/CHS2U E (9.5” Base Chassis/9.5”
Expansion Chassis)
2 - 100
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
3 CHS2U-US (19” Chassis) & 1 CHS2U B-US/CHS2U E (9.5” Base Chassis/9.5”
Expansion Chassis)
4 CHS2U-US (19” Chassis) & 0 CHS2U B-US/CHS2U E (9.5” Base Chassis/9.5”
Expansion Chassis)
User Programming Ability
A station user can perform programming functions. Speed Group Dialing and
Function Keys are just two features programmable from a station.
Virtual Extensions
Enhancements
With Version 3000 or higher system software, the appropriate line key page
automatically displays for incoming calls on the DTL-8LD-1 (DESI-Less) and
ITL-320C-1 terminals.
Calls can be parked from a virtual extension (Version 3000 or higher software).
With Version 7000 or higher software, a special ringtone is provided when a
pre-assigned extension places an Intercom call.
Virtual Extensions are available software extensions on the Basic and Expanded Port
Packages. A Virtual Extension assigned to a line key, can appear and ring on an
individual station or multiple stations and be used for outbound access.
Virtual Extensions (VE) are shared with Call Arrival (CAR) Keys. In virtual extension
mode, the key acts as a secondary extension. Up to 256 CAR/VE keys are provided.
VM8000 InMail
Enhancements
Version 4000 or higher software provides the following:

Security Code Enhancement. After a subscriber sets their Security Code, they can
choose to make it required for all logons or just remote logons. When enabled for all
logons, the subscriber must always enter their Security Code to access voice mail,
even from their own extension. If enabled just for remote logons, the subscriber can
go right into voice mail from their own telephone. However, the Security Code is still
required from another extension or from outside the system.
The Security Code logon option is a convenience for those who normally leave their
office locked or otherwise secure. Those who work in open areas should normally set
their mailbox to always require a Security Code.

VM8000 InMail voice mail is supported for centralized voice mail in a Netlink network.

VM8000 InMail supports a maximum of 16 ports.
General Description Manual
2 - 101
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Enhancements (Continued)
Version 5000 or higher software provides the following:

VM8000 InMail supported for Centralized Voice Mail in a CCIS Network.
Version 6000 or higher software provides the following:

Find-Me Follow-Me supports day of week scheduling in addition to time of day. This
applies to station and group subscriber mailboxes. This feature requires Version
6000 Enhancement License (0035).

Message Notification supports day of week scheduling in addition to time of day.
This applies to station and group subscriber mailboxes. This feature requires
Version 6000 Enhancement License (0035).

Email Notification supports options to Save, Delete or Keep as New any voice
message forwarded to the email system. This applies to station and group
subscriber mailboxes.

Auto Play: Mailboxes can now be set to automatically start playing new messages on
log in for station and group subscriber mailboxes. This applies when logging in
remotely or from inside the system. This feature requires Version 6000
Enhancement License (0035).

Save as New: This allows users the ability to mark a message as “New” after play
back has finished. InMail currently marks messages as “to be saved” (auto-save) or
“to be deleted” (auto-erase) after listening has finished. This new feature allows users
to override the “to be saved” or “to be deleted” setting and return the message back
to the “New” state. This feature requires Version 6000 Enhancement License
(0035).
The VM8000 InMail is a low cost voice mail solution that mounts onto the
CD-CP00-US. Its programming is fully integrated with chassis programming. This
system offers most voice mail system features customers expect.
Automated Attendant automatically answers the system incoming calls. After
listening to a customized message, an outside caller can dial a system extension or
use Voice Mail.
Up to 16 VM8000 InMail voice mail ports are available. Configurations available are
2-, 4- and 16-port. Each reduces the total station ports available by the same number
of licensed VM8000 ports. Integrated Voice Mail enhances the telephone system with
the following features:
2 - 102

Call Forwarding to Voice Mail

Leaving a Message

Transferring to Voice Mail

Live Record

Live Monitor

Voice Mail Overflow

Message Center Mailbox
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0

Voice Mail Caller ID

Voice Mail Queuing

Message Key will Operate as Voice Mail Key

VM8000 InMail Available

VM8000 InMail: External Transfer Available

VM8000 InMail: Softkey With Security Code Programming

VM8000 InMail: Internal Message Notification Timer

VM8000 InMail: Directory Dialing

VM8000 InMail: Multiple Greetings

VM8000 InMail: Message Playback Options
VM8000 InMail Park and Page
Enhancements
This feature added with Version 1100.
VM8000 InMail Park and Page can automatically Park a call at an extension and
Page the user with a prerecorded Paging Message announcing the parked call. The
called extension user can then go to any telephone and implement Personal Park to
pick up the call. With VM8000 InMail Park and Page, InMail tries to locate the person
instead of just sending the call to their mailbox. Additionally, there is no need for an
operator or receptionist to manually answer the call, park it, and then try to track down
the employee.
The Paging Message is usually recorded in the user’s own voice and typically says
something like, “Mike Smart, you have a call.” If the Paging Message is not recorded
for the extension, a built-in message announces the called party’s name or extension
number (if the name is not recorded).
VM8000 InMail Park and Page is available for all types of trunk calls that are
redirected to voice mail via forwarding or overflow, including transferred calls, Direct
Inward Lines, and Direct Inward Dialing. Park and Page is also available for
Automated Attendant Screened (STRF) and Unscreened (UTRF) Transfers.
Optionally, an extension can have calls from the Automated Attendant immediately
Park and Page without trying their extension first.
When VM8000 InMail Park and Page intercepts the call, it normally offers the caller
four options:
1.
Dial 1 to leave a message in the called extension’s mailbox.
(The caller hears the mailbox greeting, if recorded.)
2.
Dial 2 to Park and Page.
(The caller returns to these options if the Park is not picked up.)
General Description Manual
2 - 103
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
3.
Dial 3 for other options.
(Normally, this routes to the extension’s Next Call Routing Mailbox.)
4.
Dial 4 for other options.
(Normally, this routes to the extensions Next Call Routing Mailbox).
VM8000 InMail Park and Page is available at Personal and Group Subscriber
Mailboxes, and can be enabled through system programming or via the subscriber’s
Mailbox Options Menu. VM8000 InMail Park and Page is not applicable to Intercom
calls.
Automated Attendant Direct to Voice Mail (DVM)
When an extension has Automated Attendant Direct to Voice Mail (DVM) enabled, all
calls from the Automated Attendant go directly to the subscriber’s mailbox. The
extension does not ring for Automated Attendant calls. The caller hears the mailbox
greeting and can leave a message, but unlike Park and Page is not normally offered
any other routing options. A subscriber typically turns on DVM when they need to
work at their desk undisturbed by outside calls from the Automated Attendant.
DVM can be enabled by the installer from system programming or by the extension
user from their Mailbox Options Menu.
Keep in mind that DVM does not block Intercom calls from co-workers or any other
type of outside call not routed through the Automated Attendant.
VM8000 InMail Upload Download Audio
Enhancements
This feature added with Version 3000.
With Version 4000 software, the User Admin (UA Mode) can change Routing
Mailbox greetings for the following Routing mailbox types: Instruction (Call
Routing), Announcement and Group.
The VM8000 InMail Upload Download Audio feature allows the upload of mailbox
greetings up to 1MB in size, recorded on a PC or professionally, to any valid
subscriber mailbox in the system. It also allows users to listen to, download and/or
delete voice mail messages from callers. Access to the InMail compact flash drive is
via the HTML User Pro (Web Pro).
2 - 104
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
VM8000 InMail – Automatic Access to VM by Caller ID
Enhancements
This feature added with Version 5000.
Before, when a user outside the system accessed their InMail mailbox, they dialed
voice mail, then entered an access code followed by their mailbox number and
password (if enabled). Starting with Version 5000 software a VM8000 InMail mailbox
can be associated with a specific caller ID (CID) number. When the CID number is
presented to the InMail it will automatically log the user into their mailbox. This
enhancement improves VM accessibility for outside callers, allowing them to simply
dial the main voice mail number and be automatically logged into their mailbox.
VM8000 InMail – Cascade Message Notification
Enhancements
This feature added with Version 4000.
Version 6000 or higher software provides the following:

Message Notification supports day of week scheduling in addition to time of day.
This applies to station and group subscriber mailboxes. This feature requires
Version 6000 Enhancement license (0035).

Cascade Message Notification options can be configured from UserPro.

In addition to User Pro, when language prompt Version 2.30 or higher is installed on
the InMail CF, the Cascade Message Notification Day of Week schedule options can
be set from the mailbox telephone interface.
If an extension user receives a new message in their mailbox, Cascading Message
Notification will call them at up to five preset destinations to let them know a new
voice mail message has arrived. A destination can be an outside number (such as a
cell phone, pager, or home office) or a co-worker's extension.
The Cascading Message Notification destinations are set up in the Notification
Schedule. Each of the five schedule entries can be individually enabled or disabled
and provides options for:

Type: Voice call or pager.

Start Hour: The time the destinations become active.

End Hour: The time the destinations become inactive.

Number: The destination telephone, pager, or extension number.

Busy Attempts: The number of times the system will try the destination when it
is busy. The system cancels notification callouts for this entry when the Busy
Attempts number is met.
General Description Manual
2 - 105
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100

RNA Attempts: The number of times the system will try the destination when it
is unanswered. The system cancels notification callouts for this entry when the
RNA Attempts number is met.

Security: Enables or disables the Security Code requirement for the notification
destinations. For example, you may want to disable the Security Code when the
destinations is your cell phone and it may be inconvenient to dial digits after
answering the notification callout.
When the extension user enables Cascading Message Notification, the system will try
each enabled destination that is active for the current time (i.e., in-schedule). The
system will not try any destinations that are disabled or are not in-schedule. When
the retries for a particular destination have been met the system will immediately
move to the next destination.
VM8000 InMail – Email Notification
Enhancements
SV8100 software Version 3000 or higher is required to support this feature.
Version 6000 or higher software provides the following:

Email Notification supports options to Save, Delete or Keep as New any voice
message that is forwarded to the email system. This applies to station and group
subscriber mailboxes. This feature requires Version 6000 Enhancement License
(0035).
Email Notification automatically sends an email notification when a Subscriber
Mailbox receives a new message. The email can optionally include the recorded
message as a wav file attachment. To hear the message, the email recipient
double-clicks the wav attachment to have the message play in their wav player (such
as Windows Media Player).
Email Notification uses SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) to deliver messages to
the recipient’s email account. If the message recipient has a mobile telephone service
provider with an SMS (Short Message Service) portal, they can optionally choose to
have text messages delivered right to their cell phone. In either case, Email
Notification does not provide synchronization – the email account and the voice
mailbox operate independently. For example, deleting the voice mail message does
not automatically delete the email and visa-versa.
If Email Notification tries to deliver an email and it doesn’t go through because of a
connection problem (i.e., no connection or a dropped connection), it will retry every 15
minutes for 24 hours. If the email still can’t go through, Email Notification cancels the
delivery. Email deliveries that fail because authentication fails or the encryption mode
is incorrect are immediately cancelled.
2 - 106
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
VM8000 InMail – Find-Me Follow-Me
Enhancements
This feature added with Version 4000.
Version 6000 or higher software provides the following:

Find-Me Follow-Me supports day of week scheduling in addition to time of day. This
applies to station and group subscriber mailboxes. Requires Version 6000
Enhancement License (0035).

Find-Me Follow-Me options can be configured from UserPro.

In addition to User Pro, when language prompt Version 2.30 or higher is installed on
the InMail CF, the Find-Me Follow-Me Day of Week schedule options can be set from
the mailbox telephone interface.
Find-Me Follow-Me helps an Automated Attendant caller locate an extension user
who is not at their desk. If their call is unanswered and is picked up by voice mail, the
caller has the option of dialing a digit to try up to three alternate Find-Me Follow-Me
destinations. A destination can be an outside number (such as a cell phone or home
office) or a co-worker's extension.
The Find-Me Follow-Me destinations are set up in the Notification Schedule. Each of
the three entries can be individually enabled or disabled and provides options for:

Start Hour: Time the destinations become active.

End Hour: Time the destinations become inactive.

Number: The destination telephone, pager or extension number.

Days of Week: Days of the week the destinations are active or inactive.
If the caller chooses the Find-Me Follow-Me option, the system will try each enabled
entry that is active for the current date and time (i.e., in-schedule). The system will
not try any entries that are disabled or are not in-schedule.
When trying the destinations, Find-Me Follow-Me skips an active, in-schedule number
that is busy, in DND, or is unanswered. When all active in-schedule destinations have
been tried the caller can then choose to try Find-Me Follow-Me again or select
another option.
You can set up Find-Me Follow-Me for an extension in system programming. In
addition, an extension user can set up Find-Me Follow-Me from their Mailbox Options.
General Description Manual
2 - 107
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
VM8000 InMail – Language Setting
Enhancements
This feature added with Version 4000.
The Language setting feature allows the telephone display language and the InMail
mailbox language to be changed from the telephone. This can be used to change
either the user’s phone or another specified telephones display and InMail language if
allowed in system programming. Either a dial access code or Softkey operation is
available.
Voice Call Recording
Enhancements
The NEC IP Recorder SonicView™ feature added with Version 3000 or higher
software.
With SonicView Version 2.7 or higher software, Windows® 7 and Windows 2008
Server (32- and 64-bit) is supported.
When using NEC DT 300 and DT 700 desktop terminals, telephone calls can be
monitored, recorded and stored. For DT 300 (TDM) terminals, the NEC 4-Port Digital
Call Logging Unit – VSR (Voice Security Recorder) is used. For DT 700 (IP)
terminals, the NEC SonicView IP Recorder is used.
Dterm ® Voice Security Recorder (VSR)
The Dterm ® Voice Security Recorder is a USB device that taps across the digital
extension pair of the NEC telephone system allowing digital recording of the
telephone user’s conversation. The file created is saved either to the local PC or
to a network location, depending on the application blade used. This adapter is
for use with digital multiline terminals. It cannot be used to record VoIP phone
conversations in a Netlink or CCIS configuration.
Two options are available for playing back calls recorded by your VSR(s). The
first is the Desktop Player which is used by an individual user to play back their
own archive of calls or to play back NEC Dterm VSR calls stored on their PC or
network. It easily manages calls from one storage location. It does not offer
many of the advanced functions of the VSR Manager, such as establishing
preset shortcuts to any number of storage folders for quick and easy access.
2 - 108
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
The second player option is the VSR Manager. Take your call recording
environment to the next level with NEC VSR application software. VSR
Manager provides advanced visibility, access, retrieval, and playback tools for
the VSR Recorder administrators. It provides an intuitive interface for
establishing shortcuts to any number of storage folders and allows the
supervisor to search across all storage folders for specific call information such
as User, Time/Date, Length of Call, etc. The application can be used to access
and manage VSR recordings whether created by the single port VSR or the
4-Port Digital Call Logging Unit. VSR Manager is built on the robust
Microsoft.net frame-work and manipulates large volumes of recordings. It is a
workhorse that delivers truly feature rich productivity tools in a familiar,
ergonomic and easy to use MS Office style interface.
These two players can be combined in any number of configurations in the
company, providing control and management where needed and simple
playback in other locations.
NEC SonicView™ IP Recorder (1.0)
The NEC SonicView™ IP Recorder application is an easy-to-use yet powerful
web-based call recording solution. The SonicView software offers robust
features designed specifically for business users who want to make use of
Enterprise call data for reporting, analysis and monitoring. The different
components that make up the SonicView application are:

Application Server

Database Server

Recording Engine

Network Infrastructure to Enable Call Recording
NEC SonicView Recorder (TDM and IP) (2.0)
The NEC SonicView™ Recorder application is an easy-to-use yet powerful
web-based call recording solution use for both IP and TDM calls. The SonicView
software offers robust features designed specifically for business users who
want to make use of Enterprise call data for reporting, analysis and monitoring.
The different components that make up the SonicView application are:

Application Server

Database Server

Recording Engine

Network Infrastructure to Enable Call Recording
General Description Manual
2 - 109
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
NEC SonicView Recorder (2.7)
The NEC SonicView™ Recorder application is an easy-to-use yet powerful
web-based call recording solution. The SonicView software offers robust
features designed specifically for business users who want to make use of
Enterprise call data for reporting, analysis and monitoring.
Voice Mail Integration (Analog)
The system provides telephone users with comprehensive Voice Mail features. Voice
Mail ends the frustration and cost of missed calls, inaccurate written messages and
telephone tag. This frees busy company receptionists and secretaries for more
productive work.
External voice mail requires available analog station ports based on the number of
voice mail ports connected.
Integrated voice mail enhances the telephone system with the following features:

Call Forwarding to Voice Mail

Leaving a Message

Transferring to Voice Mail
Voice Mail Queuing
When accessing the voice mail, the system provides a voice mail queue. If all the
voice mail ports are busy, any call trying to get to the voice mail is placed in queue. As
the voice mail ports become available, the calls are connected to the voice mail in the
order in which they were received.
As the Voice Mail Queue follows Department Hunting programming, the queue can
hold a maximum of 10 calls. If the queue is full or if the voice mail ports are not
assigned to a Department Group, the calls are handled as though no voice mail
queuing feature is enabled. The calls either access voice mail if a port is available or
they receive a busy signal.
The Voice Mail Queuing feature does not work with the Conversation Record feature.
MSG Key will Operate as Voice Mail Key
The system enhances a telephone MSG key function when connected to a system
which has Voice Mail installed. When an extension receives a Voice Mail, the MSG
key can be used to check the number of messages in Voice Mail or call the Voice Mail
to listen to the messages.
Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys
Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys indicates a new Voice Mail message on
Line Keys or DSS/BLF keys.
2 - 110
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Voice Over
Voice Over lets a user interrupt a busy station user that is on another call. With Voice
Over, the busy extension user hears an alert tone followed by the voice of the
interrupting party. The extension user receiving the Voice Over can respond to the
interrupting party without being heard by the original caller. If desired, the user can
easily switch between their original caller and the interrupting co-worker. The original
caller and the interrupting party can never hear each other.
Voice Over could help a lawyer, for example, waiting for an urgent call. While on a
call with another client, the lawyer paralegal could announce the urgent call as soon
as it comes in. The lawyer could then give the paralegal instructions how to handle
the situation – all without the original client hearing the conversation.
Both multiline terminal users and 500/2500 set users can initiate and receive a Voice
Over.
To enable Voice Over, a multiline terminal can have a function key programmed for
Voice Over. In addition to one-touch Voice Over operation, the key shows the Voice
Over status as follows:
When the key is . . .
You are . . .
Off
Not using Voice Over
Flashing (Red)
Listening to the interrupting party
On (Green)
Responding to the interrupting party
Voice Response System (VRS)
Enhancements
With Version 3000 or higher system software, if an outside caller dials an invalid
extension number when connected to the VRS Automated Attendant or calling in
on a DISA trunk, the following new options are available to route these calls:

Extension Number (e.g., operator)

F-Route Dial (e.g., outside phone number)
The PZ-VM21 daughter board provides the option for the Voice Response System
(VRS) which gives the system voice recording and playback ability. The VRS
CompactFlash card provides up to 100 system messages (General Message,
Automated Attendant greetings, ACD messages, and the 900 Preamble).

General Message – provides a recorded message which any user can hear.

Automated Attendant (Operator Assistance) – answers incoming calls, plays a
greeting to the caller, and then lets the caller directly dial a system extension.
General Description Manual
2 - 111
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100


ACD Messages – provides announcement and overflow messages for ACD
groups.
Transfer to the VRS – any extension user can Transfer their outside call to the
VRS.

Voice Prompting Messages – plays call and feature status messages to users.

900 Preamble – alerts callers using 900 lines of the cost and features of the
pay-per-call service.

Time, Date and Station Number Check – lets a multiline terminal extension user
quickly hear a recording for the time, date, or the extension number.
Voice Response System (VRS) Embedded VRS
Enhancements
This feature added with Version 4000 (4.01 or higher).
Embedded VRS provides one channel of VRS without having the PZ-VM21 (VMDB)
and CompactFlash installed on the CPU, therefore allowing the voice prompt to be
saved on flash memory on the CPU (Embedded VRS). This feature is disabled when
the InMail CompactFlash is installed.
Voice Response System (VRS) Upload Download Audio
Enhancements
This feature added with Version 3000.
The Voice Response System (VRS) Upload Download Audio feature allows the
upload of VRS greetings up to 1MB in size, recorded on a PC or professionally, to any
valid VRS message in the system. It also allows users to listen to and delete VRS
messages from callers. Access to the InMail/VRS compact flash drive is via the HTML
User Pro (Web Pro).
Starting with Version 4000 software, the User Admin (UA Mode) can change Routing
Mailbox greetings for the following Routing mailbox types: Instruction (Call Routing),
Announcement and Group.
2 - 112
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Voice Response System (VRS) – Call Forwarding – Park
and Page
Enhancements
This feature previously supported as Call Forwarding - Park and Page, has been
renamed Voice Response System (VRS) – Call Forwarding – Park and Page with
Version 1100.
When an extension user is away from their phone, VRS Park and Page can let them
know when they have a call waiting to be answered. The Personal Greeting and Park
& Page options can have up to 200 messages total (note that the Park & Page feature
uses two messages). To enable VRS Park and Page, the user records a Personal
Greeting along with an additional Paging announcement. VRS Park and Page then
answers an incoming call and plays the Personal Greeting to the caller. The caller
then listens to Music on Hold (if available) while the system broadcasts the recorded
Paging announcement. When the extension user hears the Page, they can go to any
telephone and use Directed Call Pickup to intercept the call.
Volume Controls
Enhancements
With Version 7000 or higher software, the handset/speaker volume for intercom
calls or outside calls can be adjusted.
Each multiline terminal user can control the volume of incoming ringing, splash tone,
Paging, Background Music, Handsfree and your handset. Multiline terminals
consolidate all adjustments into the volume buttons. Press the VOLUME  or
VOLUME  to adjust the volume level for the active feature (e.g., outside call, ICM,
ICM ringing, or paging). Press these keys when the telephone is idle to adjust the
contrast level of the telephone display. The users should set the volumes for their
most comfortable level.
Warning Tone for Long Conversation
The system can broadcast warning tones to a trunk caller warning the user that he
has been on the call too long. If he chooses, the caller can disregard the tones and
continue talking. The outside caller does not hear the warning tones. Warning tones
do not occur for Intercom calls and most incoming trunk calls. DISA trunks can also
have warning tones. Warning tones are not available to analog single line telephone
(SLT) users.
General Description Manual
2 - 113
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
There are two warning tones: Alarm Tone 1 and Alarm Tone 2. Alarm Tone 1 is the
first set of tones that occur after the user initially places a trunk call. Alarm Tone 2
broadcasts periodically after Alarm Tone 1 as a continued reminder. Each alarm tone
consists of three short beeps.
If programmed, DISA is disconnected unless the continue code is entered by the user.
With the Long Conversation Cutoff feature, incoming or outgoing central office calls
can also be disconnected.
Warning Tone for DISA Callers
For DISA callers, with this feature enabled, the warning tone time begins when an
incoming DISA call places an outgoing call and either the inter-digit time expires or
the outgoing call is answered.
If an outside call is transferred to forwarded off-premise using an outside trunk, the
warning tone timer begins immediately. This occurs only if either trunk involved in the
call is programmed for this feature (Program 14-01-17). To transfer a trunk call
off-premise, Program 14-01-13 must be set to 1.
Wireless DECT (SIP)
Enhancements
With Version 4000 (4.01 or higher) software, the SIP DECT handset can display
the calling name on an inbound call. This priority is fixed in system programming.
With Version 4000, Program 15-05-17 is no longer used.
With Version 5000 (5.00 or higher) software, Off-hook signaling and Caller ID
display after a call transfer has been added.
With SV8100 Version 5000 (5.00 or higher) software and PZ-IPLB daughter
board installed, half duplex connections are not supported. For troubleshooting
purposes, a managed switch capable of port mirroring is required to capture packet
data from the SV8100 IPLB Ethernet port.
The Wireless DECT (SIP) (Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunication) system
allows using DECT 6.0 DECT (SIP) handsets. These handsets provide the freedom
and convenience of a wireless telephone but also allow access to features provided
by the UNIVERGE SV8100 system.
The number of Wireless DECT (SIP) handsets supported by the UNIVERGE SV8100
is dependant on the number of SIP Client licenses.
Components of the Wireless DECT (SIP) system include the following:
NEC C124 SIP DECT Handset
The handset has the following features:

2 - 114
Alphanumeric Display with Backlight
Features
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0

LED Indication for Incoming Calls

Telephone Book with 40 entries
While idle, dial the number to be stored, then press > and OK. Enter the name
associated with the number using the dial pad, and press OK.

Silent Mode (mute all sounds)

Redial Function (last 10 numbers)
Press  and continue to press  to scroll through the numbers. Press Hook
key to dial a number.

Programming Pause
A long press on # adds a pause to pre-dial or phone book numbers.

Adjustable Volume
Ring volume can be adjusted using  and  on the handset.

Key Lock
Press OK and  to lock the dial pad.

Ten Different Ring Tones
Ring tones can be selected in the tone setup menu and press OK.

Microphone Mute
Press
while the telephone is off-hook to mute the microphone.

Caller ID Presentation

Headset Connection

R-Key for Transfer and Special Services
When off-hook, press R to Recall, transfer.
NEC G955 SIP DECT Handset
Features
Call
Handling
Features
Description


Call reject option
Caller filter
Crystal clear speech and seamless handover
On-hook number preparation
Silent charging
Talk time: 12 hours

Automatic Call answer
Caller log
CLI (name and number support): when available
in a directory presented by name
Last number redial
Recall/hold (enquiry)
Standby time: 120 hours
Directory

Phone book multiple numbers per contact

Personal phone book
Display

Color Graphic TFT display
160 X 128 pixels (262k)

Illuminated display: Incoming calls and
messages
Headset

Headset support

Bluetooth headset support: via additional
Bluetooth module





General Description Manual




2 - 115
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Features
Keys
Description

On and off-hook key: 2 separate keys


Function and keypad keys: 24 keys with 12
keypad keys (0 ~ 9, , #), with text mode support
Recall or enquiry key
Menu navigation keys: programmable short keys,
up, down, left, right
Power On/Off key

Increase and decrease volume
OK/confirm key
Programmable Soft keys (2 keys menu
dependent function)
Keypad lock
Localization

Multiple supported languages: 13

Triple frequency band
Menu

Easy menu programming
Mobility/
Other

Multiple subscriptions DECT systems:
8 DECT systems
Sound/Audio


Microphone mute
Silent ring support

Adjustable ringer volume
Loudspeaker mode/hands free
Adjustable earpiece/loudspeaker volume
Security

Automatic encryption for secure calls
Service/
Maintenance

Software upgrading via air interface
Easy subscription to another handset: by
transferring memory card to another handset

Backup of local data storage: via additional 64k
memory card
User Data

Internal memory: for storage of local data
Storage of local user data: personal phone book,
caller log, caller filter and calender entries

Memory card: the storage capacity can be
doubled by adding a memory card. The memory
card also contains the subscription information
Visible indicators: Icon driven menu
Distinctive melodies for messages and priorities
Status line indicators in the display

Ringer tones/melodies: 20 distinctive melodies
for external, internal calls
Audible indicators are user selectable






User
Interface







Off-Hook Signaling
This feature enables the display of off-hook signaling on an IP DECT terminal
while talking with the 1st call.
Caller ID Display After a Call Transfer
Previously in case of screened transfer, if a call was from a trunk line or legacy
terminal, etc, the transferrer's calling party number was displayed in IP DECT. In
case of an unscreened transfer, the calling party number from where the call
was transferred is displayed on the IP DECT.
This feature enables the IP DECT terminal to display the calling party number of
the original caller (Transferee) when making a screened or unscreened transfer
to an IP DECT terminal.
2 - 116
Features
Equipment
SECTION 1
EQUIPMENT LIST
The following tables list all equipment for the SV8100 system.
Table 3-1 Chassis Equipment List
Stock Number
Equipment Name
Chapter
Equipment Description
670015
CHS2U-US
19” Chassis (6-slot)
670016
CHS2U GW-US
9.5” Gateway Chassis (3-slot)
670067
CHS2U B-US
9.5” Base Chassis (3-slot)
670068
CHS2U E
9.5” Expansion Chassis (3-slot)
3
Table 3-2 Chassis Installation Equipment List
Stock Number
Equipment Name
Equipment Description
670019
CHS BASE UNIT
Floor Mount Set for all chassis (CHS1U-US and
CHS2U-US)
670500
CHS2U BLANK SLOT COVER
KIT
Blank Slot Cover Set
670501
CHS2U JOINT BRACKET KIT
Upper Joint Bracket for 6-slot Chassis
670508
CHS2U RACK MOUNT KIT
Rack Mount for CHS2U-US Chassis
670510
CHS1U/2U WALL MOUNT KIT
Wall Mount Set for CHS2U-US Chassis
670513
CHS Stand Kit (K)
Stand Mount Kit for 2U Chassis
670522
CHS2U STAND KIT (EXT)
Expansion Plate for Stand Mount Kit for 6-blade
Chassis, 2 sets
670523
CHS1U BLANK SLOT COVER
KIT(BUS)
Blank Bus Cover
0910008
IP3-RACK MOUNT BAR SET
Rack Mount Set for CHS2U B-US and CHS2U E
General Description Manual
3-1
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 3-3 Battery Mount Equipment List
Stock Number
Equipment Name
Equipment Description
670511
CHSGW SMALL BATT BOX
Short-term battery box for 3-slot chassis
Backup Time – 10 minutes
670505
CHS LARGE BATT BOX
Long Term Battery Box for CHS1U-US and
CHS2U-US Chassis
Cable between batteries – 9.06in/230mm
Fuse Unit to Batteries – 18.11ln/460mm
Cable from chassis to battery box – 81.1in/2060mm
670509
CHS2U BATT MTG KIT
Battery Mount for CHS2U-US Chassis
Backup time – 10 minutes
670511
CHSGW SMALL BATT SET
Short-term battery set for 3-slot chassis
670512
CHS LARGE BATT SET
Long term battery set
(3) 12V 7Ah SLA Batteries with Faston 187 terminals
670533
CHS2U INT BATT SET
Internal battery set for CHS2U-US chassis
12V 2.3Ah SLA Battery with Faston 187
Table 3-4 Blade Equipment List
Stock Number Equipment Name Abbreviations
3-2
Equipment Description
670005
CD-CP00-US
CPU
Main Processor Blade for KTS
670100
PZ-BS10
BUS0
Expansion Chassis Interface Unit, 3-jack
670101
PZ-BS11
BUS1
Expansion Chassis Interface Unit, 1-jack
670103
PZ-VM21
VMDB
16 Channels for Voice Mail with a Single Channel
V34 Modem
670104
PZ-32IPLA
VoIPDB
32-channel VOIP on CCPU
670105
PZ-64IPLA
VoIPDB
64-channel VOIP on CCPU
670106
PZ-128IPLA
VoIPDB
128-channel VOIP on CCPU
670107
CD-8DLCA
DLC
8-port Digital Station Interface
670108
PZ-8DLCB
DLCDB
670109
CD-16DLCA
DLC
16-port Digital Station Interface
670110
CD-4COTB
COT
4-port Loop/ground Start Trunks
670111
PZ-4COTF
COTDB
670112
CD-4LCA
LC
670113
PZ-4LCA
LCDB
8-port Digital Station Interface on CD-8DLCA
4-port Loop/ground Start Trunks on CD-4COTB,
CD-LTA
4-port Single Line Telephone Interface
4-port Single Line Telephone Interface on CD-4LCA
and CD-8LCA
Equipment
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Table 3-4 Blade Equipment List (Continued)
Stock Number Equipment Name Abbreviations
Equipment Description
670114
CD-8LCA
LC
670115
PZ-8LCE
LCDB
670116
CD-2BRIA
BRT
670117
PZ-2BRIA
BRTDB
670118
CD-PRTA
PRT
1 Primary Rate Interface
670119
CD-CCTA
CCT
Common Channel Interoffice Signalling Trunk
Interface/Common Channel Handler
670120
CD-4DIOPA
DIOP
4 DID/OPX
670121
CD-4ODTA
ODT
4-port Tie Line Interface (E&M)
670122
CD-RTB
RTB
Router
670123
CD-VM00
VM00
Voice Mail and Server
670124
CD-ETIA
GSWU
PoE Gigabit Switch Unit
670127
PZ-ME50-US
670128
CD-LTA
670130
MGN-U10 ETU
670131
CD-PVAA
CNF
670168
PZ-32IPLB
VoIPDB
32-channel VOIP on CCPU
670169
PZ-64IPLB
VoIPDB
64-channel VOIP on CCPU
670170
PZ-128IPLB
VoIPDB
128-channel VOIP on CCPU
670213
CD-8COTBH
COT
8-port Loop and Ground Start
670214
CD-16LCAH
LC
16-port Analog Terminal Blade
670215
CD-LTDH
670420
InUCB
670421
CD-InServer
MEM
LTA
MGN-U10 ETU
COMBO
InUCB
InServer
8-port Single Line Telephone Interface
8-port Single Line Telephone Interface on CD-4LCA
and CD-8LCA
2 Basic Rate Interface
2 Basic Rate Interface on CD-2BRIA, for SV8100
can also be mounted on the CD-LTA blade
Memory Expansion on CD-CP00-US
8 Digital Station/2SLT for CD-CP00-US only
IPK/IPK II Migration
Packet Voice Application
8-Port Digital Station/2-Port Analog Station/4-Port
Analog Trunk
Supports InUCB
Supports Desktop Suite and ACD MIS
Table 3-5 Cable Equipment List
Stock Number
Equipment Name
Equipment Description
670516
RS CONSOLE CA-A
MAT (PCPro) Cable 6.6 ft. (2.0m)
670517
RS NORM-4S CA-F
RS-232C Cable (normal) 13.1 ft (4m)
General Description Manual
3-3
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 3-5 Cable Equipment List (Continued)
Stock Number
Equipment Name
Equipment Description
670518
RS RVS-15S CA-F
RS-232C Cable (reverse) 49.2 ft (15.0m)
670519
RS RVS-4S CA-F
RS 232C Cable (reverse) 13.1 ft (4.0m)
670520
RS RVS-4S CA-G
RS 232C Cable (reverse) 13.1 ft (4.0m)
670521
RS PRT-15S CA-F
RS-232C Cable (printer) 49.2 ft (15.0m)
670528
BUS CABLE
Bus Cable
670529
AC CORD
AC Power Cable for US
670530
CHS2U BATT CA INT
CHS2U-US Battery Cable for Internal Battery 2U
Chassis
Cable A – 18.9in/480mm
Cable B – 3.15in/80mm
670531
CHS2U BATT CA EXT-A
Battery Cable for External Battery 6-slot Chassis
Table 3-6 Digital Multiline Terminal (DT300 Series) Equipment List
Stock Number
3-4
Equipment Name
Equipment Description
680000
DTL-2E-1 (BK) TEL
Economy Digital 2-button Telephone (No-Display)
680001
DTL-6DE-1 (BK) TEL
Economy Digital 6-button Display Telephone
680062
DTL-12E-1 (BK) TEL
Economy Digital 12-button Display Telephone
680002
680003
DTL-12D-1 (BK) TEL
DTL-12D-1 (WH) TEL
Value Digital 12-button Display Telephone
680004
680005
DTL-24D-1 (BK) TEL
DTL-24D-1 (WH) TEL
Value Digital 24-button Display Telephone
680006
680007
DTL-32D-1 (BK) TEL
DTL-32D-1 (WH) TEL
Value Digital 32-button Display Telephone
680008
DTL-12BT-1 (BK) TEL
Value Digital 12-button Telephone with Bluetooth
Cordless Headset
680009
DTL-12PA-1 (BK) TEL
Value Digital 12-button Telephone with Power Failure
Adapter
680010
680011
DTL-8LD-1 (BK) TEL
DTL-8LD-1 (WH) TEL
Value Digital 8-button Telephone (DESI-less)
680012
680013
DCL-60-1 (BK) CONSOLE
DCL-60-1 (WH) CONSOLE
60-button Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
680014
680015
8LK-L (BK) UNIT
8LK-L (WH) UNIT
8-button Line Key Unit
680016
680017
8LKD (LD)-L (BK) UNIT
8LKD (LD)-L (WH) UNIT
DESI-less 8-button Line Key Unit/LCD Unit for Digital
Telephone
Equipment
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Table 3-6 Digital Multiline Terminal (DT300 Series) Equipment List (Continued)
Stock Number
680608
680609
Equipment Name
LCD (BL)-L (BK) UNIT
LCD (BL)-L (WH) UNIT
Equipment Description
LCD Unit (Backlight LCD) for Digital Telephone
Table 3-7 IP Multiline Terminal (DT700 Series) Equipment List
Stock Number
Equipment Name
Equipment Description
690000
ITL-2E-1 (BK) TEL
Economy IP 2-button Telephone (No Display)
690001
ITL-6DE-1 (BK) TEL
Economy IP 6-button Display Telephone
690071
ITL-8LDE-1 (BK) TEL
Economy IP 8-button Display Telephone
690002
690003
ITL-12D-1 (BK) TEL
ITL-12D-1 (WH) TEL
Value IP 12-button Display Telephone
690004
690005
ITL-24D-1 (BK) TEL
ITL-24D-1 (WH) TEL
Value IP 24-button Display Telephone
690006
690007
ITL-32D-1 (BK) TEL
ITL-32D-1 (WH) TEL
Value IP 32-button Display Telephone
690009
ITL-12PA-1 (BK) TEL
Value IP 12-button Telephone with Power Failure
Adapter
690010
690011
ITL-8LD-1 (BK) TEL
ITL-8LD-1 (WH) TEL
Value IP 8 Line Key Display Telephone
Value IP Telephone: DESI-less
690012
ITL-320C-1 (BK) TEL
Sophisticated Telephone
690013
690014
8LKI (LD)-L (BK) UNIT
8LKI (LD)-L (WH) UNIT
DESI-less LK/LCD Unit for IP
Table 3-8 SV8100 Optional Equipment List
Stock Number
Equipment Name
Equipment Description
670201
Appointment Reminder
External Server
670548
IPv6-Adapter
Converts IPv4 to IPv6 protocol
680600
APR-L UNIT
Analog Port Ringer (DT 300 only)
680601
ADA-L UNIT
Ancillary Device Adapter
680602
BHA-L UNIT
Bluetooth® Hub Adapter
680603
680604
PSA-L (BK) UNIT
PSA-L (WH) UNIT
Power Save Adapter
680605
BCH-L (BK) UNIT
Bluetooth Cordless Handset
General Description Manual
3-5
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 3-8 SV8100 Optional Equipment List (Continued)
Stock Number
3-6
Equipment Name
Equipment Description
680606
680607
12LK-L (BK) KIT
12LK-L (WH) KIT
12-button Line Key Kit
680610
WM-L UNIT
Wall Mount Unit
680754
DSS WM-L UNIT
Wall Mount Unit for DCL-60-1
680650
DESI ITL/DTL-2E (25 PKG)
DESI Sheet for Economy 2-button Telephone
(2 Part Sheet, 25 Package)
680651
DESI ITL/DTL-6DE (25 PKG)
DESI Sheet for Economy 6-button Display Telephone
(2 Part Sheet, 25 Package)
680652
DESI ITL/DTL-12D (25 PKG)
DESI Sheet for Value 12-button Display Telephone (2
Part Sheet, 25 Package)
680653
DESI ITL/DTL-8LK (25 PKG)
DESI Sheet for 8-button Line Key (1 Part Sheet, 25
Package)
680654
DESI DCL-60 (25 PKG)
DESI Sheet for 60DSS (1 Part Sheet, 25 Package)
680655
DESI ITL/DTL-SIDE (25 PKG)
DESI Sheet for Clear Side Panel (Left and Right Part
Sheet, 25 Package)
680656
DESI ITL/DTL-SIDE-LCDV (25
PKG)
DESI Sheet for Value Telephone LCD (Left and Right
Part Sheet, 25 Package)
680657
DESI ITL/DTL-SIDE-LCDS (25
PKG)
DESI Sheet for Sophisticated Telephone LCD (Left
and Right Part Sheet, 25 Package)
680658
DESI ITL/DTL Directory Card
Directory Card
680659
DESI ITL/DTL-24D (25 PKG)
DESI Sheet for Value 24-button Display Telephone (2
Part Sheet, 25 Package)
680700
Panel (Red-Base)-L UNIT
Color Side Panel for Base (Red)
680701
Panel (Red-VLCD)-L UNIT
Color Side Panel for Value Telephone LCD (Red)
680702
Panel (Red-SLCD)-L UNIT
Color Side Panel for Sophisticated Telephone LCD
(Red)
680703
Panel (Blue-Base)-L UNIT
Color Side Panel for Base (Blue)
680704
Panel (Blue-VLCD)-L UNIT
Color Side Panel for Value Telephone LCD (Blue)
680705
Panel (Blue-SLCD)-L UNIT
Color Side Panel for Sophisticated Telephone LCD
(Blue)
680706
Panel (Silver-Base)-L UNIT
Color Side Panel for Base (Silver)
680707
Panel (Silver-VLCD)-L UNIT
Color Side Panel for Value Telephone LCD (Silver)
680708
Panel (Silver-SLCD)-L UNIT
Color Side Panel for Sophisticated Telephone LCD
(Silver)
680709
Panel (Wood-Base)-L UNIT
Color Side Panel for Base (Wood)
680710
Panel (Wood-VLCD)-L UNIT
Color Side Panel for Value Telephone LCD (Wood)
Equipment
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Table 3-8 SV8100 Optional Equipment List (Continued)
Stock Number
Equipment Name
Equipment Description
680711
Panel (Wood-SLCD)-L UNIT
Color Side Panel for Sophisticated Telephone LCD
(Wood)
680712
Panel( Logo-Base)-L UNIT
Color Side Panel for Base (Wood with Logo)
680713
Panel (Clear-Base)-L UNIT
Color Side Panel for Base (Clear)
680714
LKPANEL(2BTN)-L (BK) UNIT
Spare Plastic Cover Kit (2-button) (Black)
680715
LKPANEL(6BTN)-L (BK) UNIT
Spare Plastic Cover Kit (6-button) (Black)
680716
680717
LKPANEL(12BTN)-L (BK) UNIT Spare Plastic Cover Kit (12-button)
LKPANEL(12BTN)-L (WH) UNIT
680718
680719
LKPANEL(24BTN)-L (BK) UNIT Spare Plastic Cover Kit (24-button)
LKPANEL(24BTN)-L (WH) UNIT
680720
680721
LKPANEL(8BTN)-L (BK) UNIT
LKPANEL(8BTN)-L (WH) UNIT
680722
680723
LKPANEL(60BTN)-L (BK) UNIT Spare Plastic Cover Kit (60-button)
LKPANEL(60BTN)-L (WH) UNIT
680724
DTL (Value)-Base-1 unit
Digital Base
680725
680726
LCDD(S)-L (BK) UNIT
LCDD(S)-L (WH) UNIT
Digital Standard Telephone LCD
680727
Ten Key (STD)-L Kit
10-Key Kit (Standard)
680728
680729
FNCKEY(STD)-L (BK) SET
FNCKEY(STD)-L (WH) SET
Standard Function Key
680730
680731
12LKSoft-L (BK) SET
12LKSoft-L (WH) SET
12-button Kit without Softkey
680732
680733
12LK(STD)-L (BK) SET
12LK(STD)-L (WH) SET
12-button on 12D Terminal (Line #13~24)
680734
680735
TKPANEL(STD)-L (BK) UNIT
TKPANEL(STD)-L (WH) UNIT
10-Key Panel
680736
680737
Cradle (STD)-L(BK)
Cradle (STD)-L(WH)
Cradle
680738
VAL DIRECTORY CARD
UNIT(L)
Directory Card Holder for Value Telephone
680739
ECO DIRECTORY CARD
UNIT(L)
Directory Card Holder for Economy Telephone
680741
Panel (Clear-VLCD)-L UNIT
Color Side Panel for Value Telephone LCD (Clear)
680742
Panel (Clear-SLCD)-L UNIT
Color Side Panel for Sophisticated Telephone LCD
(Clear)
680743
680744
LKPANEL(16BTN)-L (BK) UNIT Spare Plastic Cover Kit (16-button)
LKPANEL(16BTN)-L (WH) UNIT
General Description Manual
Spare Plastic Cover Kit (8-button)
3-7
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 3-8 SV8100 Optional Equipment List (Continued)
Stock Number
3-8
Equipment Name
Equipment Description
680745
680746
KeyKitPanel (Value) (BK) Unit
KeyKitPanel (Value) (WH) Unit
Spare Plastic Cover Key Kit for Value Telephone
680747
680748
KeyKitPanel (Retro) (BK) Unit
KeyKitPanel (Retro) (WH) Unit
Spare Plastic Cover Key Kit for Retro Telephone
680749
680750
KeyKitPanel (Sophi) (BK) Unit
KeyKitPanel (Sophi) (WH) Unit
Spare Plastic Cover Key Kit for Sophisticated
Telephone
680756
KeyKitPanel(V)-L (M-Blue) Unit
Color face panel for Value (Metallic Blue)
1 set consists 10 of panels
680757
KeyKitPanel(V)-L (GUNMETA)
Unit
Color face panel for Value (GunMetallic)
1 set consists 10 of panels
680758
KeyKitPanel(V)-L (L-Green-M)
Unit
Color face panel for Value (Lime Green Metallic) 1
set consists 10 of panels
680759
KeyKitPanel(V)-L (Orange-M)
Unit
Color face panel for Value (Orange Metallic)
1 set consists 10 of panels
680760
KeyKitPanel(V)-L (D-Brown-M)
Unit
Color face panel for Value (Dark Brown Metallic) 1
set consists 10 of panels
680761
LKPANEL(12BTN)-L
(M-Blue) UNIT
Color LK panel (12button) for Value
(Metallic Blue) 1 set consists 10 of panels
680762
LKPANEL(12BTN)-L
(GUNMETA) UNIT
Color LK panel (12button) for Value (GunMetallic) 1
set consists 10 of panels
680763
LKPANEL(12BTN)-L
(L-Green-M) UNIT
Color LK panel (12button) for Value (Lime Green
Metallic) 1 set consists 10 of panels
680764
LKPANEL(12BTN)-L
(Orange-M) UNIT
Color LK panel (12button) for Value (Orange
Metallic) 1 set consists 10 of panels
680765
LKPANEL(12BTN)-L
(D-Brown-M) UNIT
Color LK panel (12button) for Value (Dark Brown
Metallic) 1 set consists 10 of panels
680766
LKPANEL(24BTN)-L
(M-Blue) UNIT
Color LK panel (24button) for Value (Metallic Blue) 1
set consists 10 of panels
680767
LKPANEL(24BTN)-L
(GUNMETA) UNIT
Color LK panel (24button) for Value (GunMetallic) 1
set consists 10 of panels
680768
LKPANEL(24BTN)-L
(L-Green-M) UNIT
Color LK panel (24button) for Value (Lime Green
Metallic) 1 set consists 10 of panels
680769
LKPANEL(24BTN)-L
(Orange-M) UNIT
Color LK panel (24button) for Value (Orange
Metallic) 1 set consists 10 of panels
680770
LKPANEL(24BTN)-L
(D-Brown-M) UNIT
Color LK panel(24button) for Value (Dark Brown
Metallic) 1 set consists 10 of panels
680771
PANEL(Pink-Base)-L UNIT
Color side panel for Base (Pink)
1 set consist of 10 pair of panels. A pair includes (1)
left and (1) right panel
Equipment
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Table 3-8 SV8100 Optional Equipment List (Continued)
Stock Number
Equipment Name
Equipment Description
680772
PANEL(Pink-VLCD)-L UNIT
Color side panel for Value LCD (Pink)
1 set consist of 10 pair of panels. A pair includes (1)
left and (1) right panel
680773
PANEL(Pink-SLCD)-L UNIT
Color side panel for Sophi LCD (Pink)
1 set consist of 10 pair of panels. A pair includes (1)
left and (1) right panel
680774
PANEL(C Gold-Base)-L UNIT
Color side panel for Base (Champagne Gold)
1 set consist of 10 pair of panels. A pair includes (1)
left and (1) right panel
680775
PANEL(C Gold-VLCD)-L UNIT
Color side panel for Value LCD (Champagne Gold) 1
set consist of 10 pair of panels. A pair includes (1)
left and (1) right panel
680776
PANEL(C Gold-SLCD)-L UNIT
Color side panel for Sophi LCD (Champagne Gold) 1
set consist of 10 pair of panels. A pair includes (1)
left and (1) right panel
680777
PANEL(BIO-Base)-L UNIT
BIO side panel for Base
1 set consist of 10 pair of panels. A pair includes (1)
left and (1) right panel
680778
PANEL(BIO-VLCD)-L UNIT
BIO side panel for Value LCD
1 set consist of 10 pair of panels. A pair includes (1)
left and (1) right panel
680779
PANEL(BIO-SLCD)-L UNIT
BIO side panel for Sophi LCD
1 set consist of 10 pair of panels. A pair includes (1)
left and (1) right panel
690100
MH240
Wireless SIP telephone
690600
690601
BS (F)-L (BK) KIT
BS (F)-L (WH) KIT
French Keypad
690602
690603
BS (S)-L (BK) KIT
BS (S)-L (WH) KIT
Spanish Keypad
690606
690607
BS (ICON)-L (BK) KIT
BS (ICON)-L (WH) KIT
ICON Support Keypad
690608
690609
BS (Retro)-L (BK) KIT
BS (Retro)-L (WH) KIT
Retrofit Support Keypad
690610
690611
BS (RetroCON)-L (BK) KIT
BS (RetroCON)-L (WH) KIT
Retrofit ICON Support Keypad
690612
BS (Braille)-L (BK) KIT
Braille Support Keypad Stickers
690614
690615
HANDSET(NARROW)-L (BK)
UNIT
HANDSET(NARROW)-L (WH)
UNIT
Spare Narrowband Handset
690616
690617
HANDSET(WIDE)-L (BK) UNIT
HANDSET(WIDE)-L (WH) UNIT
Spare Wideband Handset
General Description Manual
3-9
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 3-8 SV8100 Optional Equipment List (Continued)
Stock Number
3 - 10
Equipment Name
Equipment Description
690618
690619
HandsetCord(12FT)-L (BK) SET Spare Handset Cord 12 Feet
HandsetCord(12FT)-L (WH)
SET
690620
690621
HandsetCord(25FT)-L (BK) SET Spare Handset Cord 25 Feet
HandsetCord(25FT)-L (WH)
SET
690622
690623
HandsetHanger-L (BK) SET
HandsetHanger-L (WH) SET
Spare Handset Hanger
690624
ITL (Value)-Base-1 unit
IP Base
690625
690626
LCDI(S)-L (BK) UNIT
LCDI(S)-L (WH)) UNIT
IP LCD Unit (without Backlight)
690627
LineCord-L (BK) SET
Spare Line Cord (BK)
690628
ITL/DTL PTM Handset (BK)
Push to Mute Handset
690629
ITL/DTL PTT Handset (BK)
Push to Talk Handset
690630
GBA-L UNIT
Gigabit Adapter
690631
AC-L UNIT
AC Adapter for GBA-L UNIT
690632
BS(V-HOTEL)-L (BK) UNIT
Standard Hotel function keypad for Value (BK) with
Blank D/F panel
690633
BS(S-HOTEL)-L (BK) UNIT
Standard Hotel function keypad for Sophi (BK) with
Blank D/F panel
730095
DTL-8R-1 Cordless DECT
Cordless Handset and Base Unit
730639
DTL-RPT-1 Repeater
Repeater for DTL-8R-1
730650
ML440
Wireless Handset
730651
AP20 Base Unit
Base Unit for ML440
750611
C124 SIP DECT Handset
SIP DECT wireless handset
750106
G955 SIP DECT Handset
SIP DECT wireless handset
780273
4-Port Digital Call Logging Unit
Digital Call Logging Unit
Equipment
UNIVERGE SV8100
SECTION 2
Issue 10.0
WEIGHTS AND DIMENSIONS
Table 3-9 SV8100 Weights and Dimensions on page 3-11 shows the shipping
weight, height, width and depth of each SV8100 digital multiline terminal, IP
multiline terminal, Dterm, Series i multiline terminal, chassis, assorted blades
and adapters.
Table 3-9 SV8100 Weights and Dimensions
Shipping
Weight 1
Height
Width
Depth
CHS2U-US
278.7 oz
(7.9 kg)
3.47 in
(88 mm)
16.9 in
(430 mm)
14.17 in
(360 mm)
CHS2U GW-US
158.7 oz
(4.5 kg)
4.53 in
(115 mm)
8.66 in
(220 mm)
14.53 in
(369 mm)
CHS2U B-US
158.7 oz
(4.5 kg)
4.53 in
(115 mm)
8.66 in
(220 mm)
14.53 in
(369 mm)
CHS2U E
158.7 oz
(4.5 kg)
4.53 in
(115 mm)
8.66 in
(220 mm)
14.53 in
(369 mm)
CD-CP00-US
7.06 oz
(0.2 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
5.71 in
(145 mm)
7.09 in
(180 mm)
PZ-ME50-US
.353 oz
(0.01 kg)
0.12 in
(3 mm)
2.56 in
(65 mm)
1.22 in
(31 mm)
CD-LTA
6.70 oz
(0.19 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
5.71 in
(145 mm)
7.09 in
(180 mm)
MGN-U10 ETU
14.6 oz
(0.41 kg)
1.89 in
(48 mm)
11.47 in
(290 mm)
8.46 in
(214 mm)
CHS LARGE BATT BOX
352.7 oz
(10 kg)
23.23 in
(590 mm)
17.72 in
(450 mm)
10.43 in
(265 mm)
CHS LARGE BATT SET
194 oz
(5.5 kg)
6.69 in
(170 mm)
5.91 in
(150 mm)
4.33 in
(110 mm)
CHSGW SMALL BATT BOX
59.97 oz
(1.7 kg)
4.53 in
(115 mm)
8.66 in
(220 mm)
3.15 in
(80 mm)
CHSGW SMALL BATT SET
31.2 oz
(0.88 kg)
5 in
(127 mm)
5.75 in
(146 mm)
4.75 in
(120.6 mm)
MPS7101
42.33 oz
(1.2 kg)
2.36 in
(60 mm)
7.08 in
(180 mm)
6.10 in
(155 mm)
PZ-BS10
2.29 oz
(.065 kg)
0.91 in
(23 mm)
2.17 in
(55 mm)
7.28 in
(185 mm)
Unit
SV8100
Common
General Description Manual
3 - 11
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 3-9 SV8100 Weights and Dimensions (Continued)
Shipping
Weight 1
Height
Width
Depth
PZ-BS11
1.975 oz
(0.056 kg)
0.91 in
(23 mm)
2.17 in
(55 mm)
7.28 in
(185 mm)
PZ-VM21
1.76 oz
(0.05 kg)
0.60”
(15 mm)
2.09 in
(53 mm)
3.35 in
(85 mm)
PZ-32IPLA
1.76 oz
(0.05 kg)
0.60 in
(15 mm)
3.15 in
(80 mm)
6.3 in
(160 mm)
PZ-64IPLA
1.76 oz
(0.05 kg)
0.60 in
(15 mm)
3.15 in
(80 mm)
6.3 in
(160 mm)
PZ-128IPLA
1.76 oz
(0.05 kg)
0.60 in
(15 mm)
3.15 in
(80 mm)
6.3 in
(160 mm)
PZ-32IPLB
1.76 oz
(0.05 kg)
0.71 in
(18 mm)
2.6 in
(66 mm)
5.4 in
(138 mm)
PZ-64IPLB
1.76 oz
(0.05 kg)
0.71 in
(18 mm)
2.6 in
(66 mm)
5.4 in
(138 mm)
PZ-128IPLB
1.76 oz
(0.05 kg)
0.71 in
(18 mm)
2.6 in
(66 mm)
5.4 in
(138 mm)
CD-8DLCA
5.89 oz
(0.167 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
5.71 in
(145 mm)
7.09 in
(180 mm)
PZ-8DLCB
4.41 oz
(0.125 kg)
0.60 in
(15 mm)
4.72 in
(120 mm)
5.12 in
(130 mm)
CD-16DLCA
7.831 oz
(0.222 kg)
1.89 in
(48 mm)
9.45 in
(240 mm)
7.68 in
(195 mm)
CD-16LCAH
14.39 oz
(0.41 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
5.5 in
(140 mm)
7.67 in
(195 mm)
CD-4COTB
6.35 oz
(0.18 kg)
1.89 in
(48 mm)
9.45 in
(240 mm)
7.68 in
(195 mm)
PZ-4COTF
3.53 oz
(0.10 kg)
1.89 in
(48 mm)
9.45 in
(240 mm)
5.12 in
(130 mm)
CD-8COTBH
13.97 oz
(0.40 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
5.5 in
(140 mm)
7.67 in
(195 mm)
CD-4LCA
5.99 oz
(0.17 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
9.45 in
(240 mm)
7.68 in
(195 mm)
PZ-4LCA
3.10 oz
(0.09 kg)
0.60 in
(15 mm)
9.45 in
(240 mm)
7.68 in
(195 mm)
CD-8LCA
6.46 oz
(0.183 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
9.45 in
(240 mm)
7.68 in
(195 mm)
PZ-8LCE
3.70 oz
(0.105 kg)
0.60 in
(15 mm)
9.45 in
(240 mm)
5.12 in
(130 mm)
Unit
3 - 12
Equipment
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Table 3-9 SV8100 Weights and Dimensions (Continued)
Shipping
Weight 1
Height
Width
Depth
CD-2BRIA
5.99 oz
(0.17 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
9.45 in
(240 mm)
7.68 in
(195 mm)
PZ-2BRIA
4.02 oz
(0.114 kg)
0.60 in
(15 mm)
4.72 in
(120 mm)
7.68 in
(195 mm)
CD-PRTA
5.5 oz
(0.156 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
9.45 in
(240 mm)
3.94 in
(100 mm)
CD-CCTA
5.5 oz
(0.156 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
9.45 in
(240 mm)
7.68 in
(195 mm)
CD-4ODTA
8.25 oz
(0.234 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
9.45 in
(240 mm)
7.68 in
(195 mm)
CD-LTDH
13.05 oz
(0.41 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
5.5 in
(140 mm)
7.67 in
(195 mm)
CD-RTB
12.17 oz
(0.345 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
5.71 in
(145 mm)
7.68 in
(195 mm)
CD-VM00
7.76 oz
(0.22 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
9.45 in
(240 mm)
7.68 in
(195 mm)
CD-PVAA
10.05 oz
(0.285 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
5.71 in
(145 mm)
7.68 in
(195 mm)
CD-ETIA
12.17 oz
(0.345 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
5.71 in
(145 mm)
7.68 in
(195 mm)
CD-4DIOPA
7.73 oz
(0.219 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
9.45 in
(240 mm)
7.68 in
(195 mm)
CD-SVRU
9.8 oz
(0.278 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
5.71 in
(145 mm)
7.68 in
(195 mm)
CHS BASE UNIT
352.7 oz
(10 kg)
4.72 in
(120 mm)
19.69 in
(500 mm)
14.37 in
(365 mm)
CHS2U BLANK SLOT COVER KIT
1.76 oz
(0.05 kg)
2.32 in
(60 mm)
1.57 in
(40 mm)
1.57 in
(40 mm)
CHS L BATT BOX RACK MOUNT BRACKET
352.7 oz
(10 kg)
18.5 in
(470 mm)
14.6 in
(370 mm)
2.76 in
(70 mm)
CHS2U INT BATT SET
95.24 oz
(2.7 kg)
4.33 in
(110 mm)
2.76 in
(70 mm)
3.15 in
(80 mm)
CHS2U RACK MOUNT KIT
17.6 oz
(0.5 kg)
0.91 in
(23 mm)
9.65 in
(245 mm)
3.35 in
(85 mm)
CHS1U/2U WALL MOUNT KIT
35.27 oz
(1 kg)
1.18 in
(30 mm)
13.8 in
(350 mm)
1.77 in
(45 mm)
CHS LARGE BATT BOX
458.6 oz
(13 kg)
5.24 in
(133 mm)
16.93 in
(430 mm)
14.3 in
(363 mm)
Unit
General Description Manual
3 - 13
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 3-9 SV8100 Weights and Dimensions (Continued)
Shipping
Weight 1
Height
Width
Depth
CHS2U JOINT BRACKET KIT
7.06 oz
(0.2 kg)
0.19 in
(3 mm)
5.91 in
(150 mm)
1.7 in
(43 mm)
CHS2U BATT MTG KIT 6 Slot
106 oz
(3.0 kg)
2.95 in
(75 mm)
4.45 in
(113 mm)
4.13 in
(105 mm)
IP3-RACK MOUNT BAR SET
45.86 oz
(1.3 kg)
2.40 in
(61 mm)
18.9 in
(480 mm)
0.47 in
(12 mm)
DTL-2E-1 (BK) TEL
35.27 oz
(1.0 kg)
4.41 in
(112 mm)
7.05 in
(179 mm)
8.86 in
(225 mm)
DTL-6DE-1 (BK) TEL
38.8 oz
(1.1 kg)
4.41 in
(112 mm)
7.05 in
(179 mm)
8.86 in
(225 mm)
DTL-12E-1 (BK) TEL
35.27 oz
(1.0 kg)
4.41 in
(112 mm)
7.05 in
(179 mm)
8.86 in
(225 mm)
DTL-8LD-1 (BK) TEL
DTL-8LD-1 (WH) TEL
45.6 oz
(1.3 kg)
4.41 in
(112 mm)
7.05 in
(179 mm)
10.39 in
(264 mm)
DTL-12BT-1 (BK) TEL
45.6 oz
(1.3 kg)
4.29 in
(109 mm)
7.6 in
(183 mm)
10.16 in
(258 mm)
DTL-12PA-1 (BK) TEL
45.6 oz
(1.3 kg)
4.41 in
(112 mm)
7.6 in
(183 mm)
10.16 in
(258 mm)
DTL-12D-1 (BK) TEL
DTL-12D-1 (WH) TEL
42.33 oz
(1.2 kg)
4.39 in
(111.7 mm)
7.05 in
(179 mm)
10.16 in
(258 mm)
DTL-24D-1 (BK) TEL
DTL-24D-1 (WH) TEL
42.33 oz
(1.2 kg)
4.39 in
(111.7 mm)
7.05 in
(179 mm)
10.16 in
(258 mm)
DTL-32D-1 (BK) TEL
DTL-32D-1 (WH) TEL
45.6 oz
(1.3 kg
4.39 in
(111.7 mm)
8.1 in
(205.8 mm)
10.16 in
(258 mm)
ITL-2E-1 (BK) TEL
35.27 oz
(1.0 kg)
4.41 in
(112 mm)
7.05 in
(179 mm)
8.86 in
(225 mm)
ITL-6DE-1 (BK) TEL
38.8 oz
(1.1 kg)
4.41 in
(112 mm)
7.05 in
(179 mm)
8.86 in
(225 mm)
ITL-8LDE-1 (BK) TEL
63.66 oz
(1.98 kg)
4.41 in
(112 mm)
7.05 in
(179 mm)
8.86 in
(225 mm)
ITL-8LD-1 (BK) TEL
ITL-8LD-1 (WH) TEL
45.6 oz
(1.3 kg)
4.41 in
(112 mm)
7.05 in
(179 mm)
10.39 in
(264 mm)
ITL-12D-1 (BK) TEL
ITL-12D-1 (WH) TEL
42.33 oz
(1.2 kg)
4.41 in
(112 mm)
7.05 in
(179 mm)
10.16 in
(258 mm)
ITL-12PA-1 (BK) TEL
45.6 oz
(1.3 kg)
4.41 in
(112 mm)
7.59 in
(193 mm)
10.16 in
(258 mm)
Unit
Digital Multiline Terminal
IP Multiline Terminal
3 - 14
Equipment
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Table 3-9 SV8100 Weights and Dimensions (Continued)
Shipping
Weight 1
Height
Width
Depth
ITL-24D-1 (BK) TEL
ITL-24D-1 (WH) TEL
42.33 oz
(1.2 kg)
4.41 in
(112 mm)
7.05 in
(179 mm)
10.16 in
(258 mm)
ITL-32D-1 (BK) TEL
ITL-32D-1 (WH) TEL
45.6 oz
(1.3 kg)
4.41 in
(112 mm)
8.1 in
(205.8 mm)
10.16 in
(258 mm)
ITL-320C-1 (BK) TEL
56.44 oz
(1.6 kg)
4.41 in
(112 mm)
8.94 in
(227 mm)
9.84 in
(250 mm)
8LK-L (BK) UNIT
8LK-L (WH) UNIT
7.05 oz
(0.2 kg)
1.77 in
(45 mm)
1.15 in
(29.3 mm)
8.82 in
(224 mm)
ADA-L UNIT
2.82 oz
(0.08 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
2.56 in
(65 mm)
2.84 in
(72 mm)
APR-L UNIT
5.29 oz
(0.15 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
2.56 in
(65 mm)
2.84 in
(72 mm)
BCH-L (BK) UNIT
31.75 oz
(0.9 kg)
4.41 in
(112 mm)
3.19 in
(81 mm)
8.8 in
(223 mm)
BHA-L UNIT
3.53 oz
(0.1 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
2.56 in
(65 mm)
2.84 in
(72 mm)
IPLA-R UNIT
2.82 oz
(0.08 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
2.24 in
(57 mm)
3.94 in
(100 mm)
IPv6-Adapter
2.82 oz
(0.08 kg)
0.98 in
(25 mm)
2.56 in
(65 mm)
2.84 in
(72 mm)
PGD(2)-U10 ADP
12.4 oz
(0.35 kg)
1.58 in
(40 mm)
6.81 in
(173 mm)
4.13 in
(105 mm)
DCL-60-1 (BK) CONSOLE
DCL-60-1 (WH) CONSOLE
21.16 oz
(0.6 kg)
3.23 in
(82 mm)
5.39 in
(137 mm)
8.82 in
(224 mm)
PSA-L (BK) UNIT
PSA-L (WH) UNIT
10.58 oz
(0.3 kg)
3.15 in
(80 mm)
2.91 in
(74 mm)
8.8 in
(223 mm)
GBA-L UNIT
23.99 oz
(0.68 kg)
5.9 in
(150 mm)
7.05 in
(179 mm)
6.34 in
(161 mm)
AC-L UNIT
12 oz
(0.34 kg)
1.10 in
(28 mm)
1.77 in
(45 mm)
3.98 in
(101 mm)
WM-L UNIT
1.58 oz
(0.045 kg)
0.996 in
(25.3 mm)
3.996 in
(101.5 mm)
4.92 in
(125 mm)
DSS WM-L UNIT
1.41 oz
(0.04 kg)
0.99 in
(25.3 mm)
3.4 in
(86.5 mm)
4.92 in
(125 mm)
G955 Wireless Handset
3.13 oz
(0.08 kg)
4.96 in
(126 mm)
1.77 in
(45 mm)
0.78 in
(20 mm)
Unit
Optional
General Description Manual
3 - 15
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 3-9 SV8100 Weights and Dimensions (Continued)
Shipping
Weight 1
Height
Width
Depth
MH240
3.53 oz
(0.1001 kg)
5.31 in
(135 mm)
1.89 in
(48 mm)
0.63 in
(16 mm)
4-Port Digital Call Logging Unit
24 oz
(0.680 kg)
0.984 in
(25 mm)
2.835 in
(72 mm)
3.30 in
(84 mm)
ML440
169.6 oz
(4.81 kg)
9.4 in
(238.8 mm)
17.2 in
(436.9 mm)
8.0 in
(203.2 mm)
AP20 Base Unit
179.2 oz
(5.08 kg)
9.5 in
(241.3 mm)
12.6 in
(320 mm)
14.0 in
(355.6 mm)
IVR External Server
160.0 oz
(4.54 kg)
1.7 in
(43 mm)
17.2 in
(437 mm)
9.8 in
(249 mm)
Unit
1 Shipping weight includes the shipping carton.
3 - 16
Equipment
Installation, Programming, and Maintenance
Overview
SECTION 1
INSTALLATION AND TECHNICAL CONSIDERATIONS
The compact UNIVERGE SV8100 chassis and front loading blades make
installation easy. The system can be wall, floor or rack mounted as
desired. The CD-CP00-US (Central Processing Unit) performs a number
of functions and operations under the control of software programs on the
CD-CP00-US package. These programs can be easily upgraded as new
features and functionalities are added to the system.
The following functionalities are provided on the CD-CP00-US:

Call Control Server

Conference Bridge Server

Voice Mail Server

SIP Server

RTP (Real-Time Transport Protocol) Forwarding

VoCoder Conversion
Chapter
4
The CD-CP00-US uses a 32-bit industrial standard CPU and associated
memories to control the system. The CD-CP00-US bus is connected to
the backplane of the chassis and provides control for other packages
installed in the UNIVERGE SV8100 chassis. The CD-CP00-US is
installed in the CD-CP00-US slot reserved for it in this chassis (no other
board works in this slot).
The Tone Generator provides various audio signals such as dial tone,
reorder tone, busy tone and DTMF (Dual Tone Multifrequency) signaling,
which comply with industrial standard tone plans. The DTMF tone sender
can resend the DTMF tone signal to a distant-end through the trunk or line
circuits. The DTMF tone receiver can receive DTMF signals sent from
industry standard telephones or distant locations.
The MF (Multifrequency) signal sender resends toll type multifrequency
signals to a central office allowing for emergency (E911) ability.
General Description Manual
4-1
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Caller ID Receiver receives Caller ID signals from the central office and converts
those signals for display on the UNIVERGE SV8100 telephones. Caller ID Generator
generates industry standard Caller ID signals, based on the digital signal delivered
from the CCPU and transmitted to the distant-end.
UNIVERGE SV8100 provides 64 conference circuits for conference calling.
The Power supply unit and the battery backup unit are installed in the SV8100
chassis and allow easy connection to extra battery backup units. All circuits installed
in the chassis are located on blades that plug into the slots.
Connecting voice and data between more than one chassis is provided by a bus
cable between the basic and expansion SV8100 chassis. Voice and data are
transmitted between the chassis using PZ-BS10 and PZ-BS11 blades in the
UNIVERGE SV8100 system.
Connecting the system to telephones, outside lines or other external devices is made
using telephone cable connectors. A music source for Music on Hold is connected by
standard audio equipment plugs.
Universal slots maximize flexibility by allowing installation of any blade in any
interface slot (except slot 1 of chassis 1 reserved for the CD-CP00-US). Full use of
each chassis, before adding another, reduces hardware requirements.
A Resident System Program is provided when the system first receives power. The
CD-CP00-US scans the chassis and recognizes the blades and multiline terminals
that are connected to the system. Standard (default) values are assigned in the
System Program for all system and device parameters to allow the system to operate
immediately after initialization, before programming is done.
The assignments provided by the Resident System Program can be altered to fit the
requirements of a particular installation. Changing programming assignments is the
function of multiline terminals or a personal computer. When programming from a
multiline terminal, Flexible Line keys and the dial pad are used to enter new values,
and the display provides the necessary information for programming.
Multiline Terminals and Single Line Telephones
A variety of telephones can be connected to satisfy the requirements of a particular
installation. All multiline terminals are fully modular and are powered from the central
unit. Cabling is twisted 1-pair for proprietary multiline terminals and single line
telephones.
4-2
Installation, Programming, and Maintenance Overview
UNIVERGE SV8100
SECTION 2
Issue 10.0
PROGRAMMING
From Multiline Terminals
Programming is done using DTH/DTR-8D-1 TEL, DTH/DTR-16D-1 TEL, DTH/
DTR-32D-1 TEL, or DTL-6/12/24/32D-1 TEL, DTL-8LD-1 TEL, ITL-6DE-1 TEL,
ITL-12/24/32D-1 TEL, ITL-8LD-1 TEL, or ITL-320C-1 TEL multiline terminals.
When a programming multiline terminal is off-line in the Program Mode, the rest of the
system continues to function. Most program changes can be entered anytime, but
some changes take effect only when the affected stations and circuits are idle. This
avoids disrupting calls in progress.
PC Programming
System data can be transferred to/from a disk for backup. The System Program End
User software allows end users to program several features for their multiline
terminals, such as: Line Key Assignment, Telephone Names, Zone Paging Groups, or
various timers.
Battery Backup
The battery on the CD-CP00-US retains the Clock/Calendar and Last Number Redial
(LNR) buffers for each station when the CD-CP00-US encounters a power loss. When
the battery is fully charged, the settings are retained for approximately three years.
The Lithium (CR2032) battery should be replaced every two years. The system
programmed memory (Customer Database) is stored in nonvolatile Memory and can
be erased only by a First Initialization.
The batteries, located in the SV8100 chassis, support system operation for up to 30
minutes during a power outage.
User Programmable Features
Multiline terminal users can program the following features from their station:

Ringing Line Preference

Feature Access and/or One-Touch keys (e.g., Speed Dial or Direct Station
Selection)

Speed Dial
Multiline terminals without programmable One-Touch keys and single line telephones
can be used to program Station Speed Dial memories. Attendant Positions can be
used to program System Speed Dial memories and the System Clock/Calendar.
General Description Manual
4-3
Issue 10.0
SECTION 3
UNIVERGE SV8100
MAINTENANCE
Installing Interface Blades without Disrupting Ongoing Calls
Each interface and optional blade has an LED indication of power status. An
interface blade (except the CD-CP00-US) with this switch OFF can be removed or
installed with the system power on.
The combination of status indication and blade replacement with power on allows the
maintenance technician to replace suspect circuits without disrupting ongoing calls.
Up/Down Load of Data
Using PC Programming, Station Speed Dial data, System Speed Dial data, and all
System Data can be transferred from/to a PC. The Up/Down Load may be
accomplished from a local or remote location.
4-4
Installation, Programming, and Maintenance Overview
Hardware Specifications
SYSTEM CAPACITIES
SECTION 1
1.1
System Chassis Capacities
The CHS2U-US UNIVERGE SV8100 system consists primarily of
the base chassis and a maximum of three expansion chassis.
Expansion chassis can be stacked vertically on the base chassis to
expand the system capacity to 320 ports. By linking two
UNIVERGE SV8100 systems via IP connection, the maximum
capacity can be increased to 712 ports (512 station/ 200 trunks).
Chapter
5
6 Slots
80 Ports
12 Slots
160 Ports
24 Slots
320 Ports
IP Connection
712 Ports
Figure 5-1 Base and Expansion Chassis
General Description Manual
5-1
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
The UNIVERGE SV8100 CHS2U GW-US is a 9.5” chassis that has three
universal slots and one PSU. The standalone module provides 48 total ports
(32 digital terminals) and can include any combination of stations and trunks
below this number.
3 Slots
48 Ports
Figure 5-2 UNIVERGE SV8100 CHS2U GW-US Chassis
Table 5-1 9.5” Gateway and 19” Maximum System Capacities – Chassis
shows the maximum number of chassis and related equipment that can be
installed in a system.
Table 5-1 9.5” Gateway and 19” Maximum System Capacities – Chassis
19”
Chassis
with CPU
19”
Chassis
without
CPU
19”
Chassis
x4
3 Slots
5 Slots
6 Slots
23 Slots
CHS2U GW-US
(9.5” Chassis)
1
–
–
CHS2U-US
(19” Chassis)
–
1
1
Hardware
Number of Slot(s) for
Interface Package
9.5”
Chassis
Networked
Chassis
(NetLink)
Comments
–
–
Gateway chassis
4
16 x (1+3)
Virtual slot in
NetLink is limited to
maximum of 240
Chassis:
5-2
Hardware Specifications
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Table 5-1 9.5” Gateway and 19” Maximum System Capacities – Chassis (Continued)
19”
Chassis
with CPU
19”
Chassis
without
CPU
19”
Chassis
x4
3 Slots
5 Slots
6 Slots
23 Slots
PZ-BS10
3-jack Expansion Board for
Controlling Chassis
0
1
0
PZ-BS11
1-jack Expansion Board for
Expansion Chassis
0
0
CHS LARGE BATT BOX
(External Battery Box)
1
CHSGW SMALL BATT
BOX
(Small Battery Box)
Hardware
9.5”
Chassis
Number of Slot(s) for
Interface Package
Networked
Chassis
(NetLink)
Comments
1

–
1
3

–
1
1
4
16 x (1+3)
–
1
–
–
–
–
–
0
1
1
4
–
1 is factory
installed with each
chassis
1
1
1
4
–
1 is factory
installed with each
chassis
Expansion:
Battery:
Fan Box:
CHS2U FAN BOX SET
Power Supply:
MPS7101

Dependent on size of system.
The UNIVERGE SV8100 9.5” CHS2U B-US and CHS2U E (Combined)
system consists primarily of a base chassis and expansion chassis.
Expansion chassis can be stacked vertically on the base chassis to expand
the system capacity to 320 ports (refer to Figure 5-3 CHS2U B-US Base and
CHS2U E Expansion Chassis on page 5-4). By linking two UNIVERGE
SV8100 systems via IP connection, the maximum capacity can be increased
to 712 ports (512 station/ 200 trunks).
General Description Manual
5-3
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
9.5” (Base)
9.5” (Base +
Expansion) x 1
3 Slots
32 Ports
9.5” (Base +
Expansion) x 2
6 Slots
80 Ports
12 Slots
160 Ports
9.5” (Base +
Expansion) x 4
IP Expansion
24 Slots
320 Ports
IP Connection
712 Ports
Figure 5-3 CHS2U B-US Base and CHS2U E Expansion Chassis
Table 5-2 9.5” Base and Expansion Maximum System Capacities – Chassis
on page 5-5 shows the maximum number of chassis and related equipment
that can be installed in a 9.5” Base and Expansion system.
5-4
Hardware Specifications
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Table 5-2 9.5” Base and Expansion Maximum System Capacities – Chassis
9.5” Base
9.5” Base
9.5” Base
+
+
+
Expansion
9.5” Base
Expansion Networked
Expansion
without
Chassis
x4
with CPU
CPU
(NetLink)
Hardware
Number of Slot(s) for
Interface Package
Comments
3 Slots
5 Slots
6 Slots
23 Slots
PZ-BS10
3-port Expansion Board for
Controlling Chassis
1
1
1
1
–
–
PZ-BS11
1-port Expansion Board for
Expansion Chassis
1
1
1
3
–
–
CHS LARGE BATT BOX
(External Battery Box)
1
1
1
4
16 x (1+3)
–
CHSGW SMALL BATT
BOX
(Small Battery Box)
1
1
1
4
16 x (1+3)
–
1
1
1
4
–
1 is factory
installed with each
chassis
Expansion:
Battery:
Power Supply:
MPS7101
1.2
System Blade Capacities
Table 5-3 SV8100 Maximum 9.5” Gateway and 19” System Capacities –
Blades on page 5-6 and Table 5-4 SV8100 Maximum 9.5” Base and
Expansion System Capacities – Blades on page 5-9 show the maximum
number for each blade that can be installed in a system.
This is determined by the maximum blade configuration allowed. When
installing single line sets, DISA, or tie lines, CPU circuits must be allocated for
DTMF receivers. To install single line sets with CO/PBX line access, or when
installing immediate-start tie lines, CPU circuits must be allocated for dial tone
detection.
General Description Manual
5-5
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 5-3 SV8100 Maximum 9.5” Gateway and 19” System Capacities – Blades
19”
Chassis
with CPU
19”
Chassis
without
CPU
19”
Chassis
x4
3 Slots
5 Slots
6 Slots
23 Slots
CD-CP00-US
1
1
0
PZ-32IPLA
(32-port VoIP Daughter Board)
1
1
PZ-64IPLA
(64-port VoIP Daughter Board)
1
PZ-128IPLA
(128-port VoIP Daughter Board)
Hardware
9.5”
Chassis
Networked
Chassis
(NetLink)
Comments
1
16
–
0
1
16
This unit provides
32 VOIP Gateway
channels
1
0
1
16
This unit provides
64 VOIP Gateway
channels
1
1
0
1
16
This unit provides
128 VOIP Gateway
channels
PZ-32IPLB
(32-port VoIP Daughter Board)
1
1
0
1
16
This unit provides
32 VOIP Gateway
channels
PZ-64IPLB
(64-port VoIP Daughter Board)
1
1
0
1
16
This unit provides
64 VOIP Gateway
channels
PZ-128IPLB
(128-port VoIP Daughter Board)
1
1
0
1
16
This unit provides
128 VOIP Gateway
channels
PZ-ME50-US
(Memory Expansion Daughter
Board)
1
1
0
1
16
–
PZ-VM21
(Voice Mail Daughter Board)
1
1
0
1
1
Does include
modem
CD-SVRU
(Windows Server Board)
1
1
1
1
1
2
5
6
23
128
Number of Slot(s) for Interface
Package
Common Control Blades:
Station Blades:
CD-4DIOPA
(4 DID/OPX)
5-6
When installed as
an OPX blade
Hardware Specifications
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Table 5-3 SV8100 Maximum 9.5” Gateway and 19” System Capacities – Blades (Continued)
19”
Chassis
with CPU
19”
Chassis
without
CPU
19”
Chassis
x4
3 Slots
5 Slots
6 Slots
23 Slots
CD-4LCA
(4 Single Line Telephone
Interface)
2
5
6
CD-8LCA
(8 Single Line Telephone
Interface)
2
5
CD-8DLCA
(8 Digital Station Interface)
2
CD-16DLCA
(16 Digital Station Interface)
Hardware
9.5”
Chassis
Networked
Chassis
(NetLink)
Comments
23
32
–
6
23
32
–
5
6
23
32
–
2
5
6
23
32
–
PZ-8DLCB
(8 Digital Station Interface
Daughter Board)
2
5
6
23
32
–
CD-16LCAH
2
5
6
23
32
–
PZ-4LCA
(4 Single Line Telephone
Interface Daughter Board)
2
5
6
23
32
–
PZ-8LCE
(8 Single Line Telephone
Interface Daughter Board)
2
5
6
23
32
–
CD-LTA
(8 Digital/2 Single Line)
2
2
2
8
23
An optional
PZ-4COTF or
PZ-2BRIA can be
installed
CD-2BRIA
(2 Basic Rate Interface)
2
5
6
23
25
–
PZ-2BRIA
(2 Basic Rate Interface Daughter
Board)
2
5
6
23
25
–
CD-4COTB
(4 Loop/Ground Start Trunk)
2
5
6
23
25
–
Number of Slot(s) for Interface
Package
(Analog Terminal Blade)
Trunk Blades:
General Description Manual
5-7
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 5-3 SV8100 Maximum 9.5” Gateway and 19” System Capacities – Blades (Continued)
19”
Chassis
with CPU
19”
Chassis
without
CPU
19”
Chassis
x4
3 Slots
5 Slots
6 Slots
23 Slots
PZ-4COTF
(4 Loop/Ground Start Trunk
Daughter Board)
2
5
6
CD-8COTBH
2
5
CD-4DIOPA
(4 DID/OPX)
2
CD-4ODTA
(4 E&M)
CD-PRTA
(1 Primary Rate Interface)
Hardware
9.5”
Chassis
Networked
Chassis
(NetLink)
Comments
23
25
–
6
23
25
–
5
6
23
50
When installed as a
DID blade
2
5
6
23
50
–
2
4
4
16
8
Blade is used for
Primary Rate
Interface or T-1
Interface
2
2
2
8
23
–
CD-PVAA
(Interactive Voice Response,
Multimedia Conference,
PVA PMS)
1
1
1
1
1
–
CD-PVAA
(CCIS Point-to-Multipoint)
2
5
6
23
32
–
CD-ETIA
(Switching Hub with Power over
Ethernet)
2
3
3
12
64
–
CD-CCTA
(CCIS Trunk Interface/Common
Channel Handler)
2
4
6
8
8
–
CD-RTB
(Router)
1
1
2
7
50
–
Number of Slot(s) for Interface
Package
(8-Port Loop and Ground
Start)
Station/Trunk Blades:
CD-LTDH
(8-Port Digital Station/2-Port
Analog Station/4-Port Analog
Trunk)
Optional Blades:
5-8
Hardware Specifications
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Table 5-3 SV8100 Maximum 9.5” Gateway and 19” System Capacities – Blades (Continued)
19”
Chassis
with CPU
19”
Chassis
without
CPU
19”
Chassis
x4
3 Slots
5 Slots
6 Slots
23 Slots
1
1
1
1
9.5”
Chassis
Hardware
Number of Slot(s) for Interface
Package
CD-VM00
(Voice Mail and Server)

Networked
Chassis
(NetLink)
1
Comments
Maximum of One
per system
A PZ-ME50-US is required when more than one CD-LTA is installed. This feature added with Version 3000.
Table 5-4 SV8100 Maximum 9.5” Base and Expansion System Capacities – Blades
Hardware
Number of Slot(s) for
Interface Package
9.5”
Base
9.5” Base 9.5” Base
9.5” Base
+
+
+
Expansion Expansion
Networked
Expansion
with CPU
without
Chassis
with CPU
x4
CPU
(NetLink)
Comments
3 Slots
5 Slots
6 Slots
23 Slots
CD-CP00-US
1
1
0
1
16
–
PZ-32IPLA
(32-port VoIP Daughter
Board)
1
1
0
1
16
This unit provides
32 VOIP Gateway
channels
PZ-64IPLA
(64-port VoIP Daughter
Board)
1
1
0
1
16
This unit provides
64 VOIP Gateway
channels
PZ-128IPLA
(128-port VoIP Daughter
Board)
1
1
0
1
16
This unit provides
128 VOIP Gateway
channels
PZ-32IPLB
(32-port VoIP Daughter
Board)
1
1
0
1
16
This unit provides
32 VOIP Gateway
channels
PZ-64IPLB
(64-port VoIP Daughter
Board)
1
1
0
1
16
This unit provides
64 VOIP Gateway
channels
PZ-128IPLB
(128-port VoIP Daughter
Board)
1
1
0
1
16
This unit provides
128 VOIP Gateway
channels
Common Control Blades:
General Description Manual
5-9
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 5-4 SV8100 Maximum 9.5” Base and Expansion System Capacities – Blades (Continued)
Hardware
Number of Slot(s) for
Interface Package
9.5”
Base
9.5” Base 9.5” Base
9.5” Base
+
+
+
Expansion Expansion
Networked
Expansion
with CPU
without
Chassis
with CPU
x4
CPU
(NetLink)
Comments
3 Slots
5 Slots
6 Slots
23 Slots
PZ-ME50-US
(Memory Expansion
Daughter Board)
1
1
0
1
16
–
PZ-VM21
(Voice Mail Daughter Board)
1
1
0
1
1
Does include
modem
CD-SVRU
(Windows Server Board)
1
1
1
1
1
CD-4DIOPA
(4 DID/OPX)
2
5
6
23
128
When installed as
an OPX blade
CD-4LCA
(4 Single Line Telephone
Interface)
2
5
6
23
32
–
CD-8LCA
(8 Single Line Telephone
Interface)
2
5
6
23
32
–
CD-8DLCA
(8 Digital Station Interface)
2
5
6
23
32
–
CD-16DLCA
(16 Digital Station Interface)
2
5
6
23
32
–
PZ-8DLCB
(8 Digital Station Interface
Daughter Board)
2
5
6
23
32
–
CD-16LCAH
2
5
6
23
32
–
PZ-4LCA
(4 Single Line Telephone
Interface Daughter Board)
2
5
6
23
32
–
PZ-8LCE
(8 Single Line Telephone
Interface Daughter Board)
2
5
6
23
32
–
Station Blades:
(Analog Terminal Blade)
5 - 10
Hardware Specifications
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Table 5-4 SV8100 Maximum 9.5” Base and Expansion System Capacities – Blades (Continued)
Hardware
Number of Slot(s) for
Interface Package
9.5”
Base
9.5” Base 9.5” Base
9.5” Base
+
+
+
Expansion Expansion
Networked
Expansion
with CPU
without
Chassis
with CPU
x4
CPU
(NetLink)
Comments
3 Slots
5 Slots
6 Slots
23 Slots
2
2
2
8
23
An optional
PZ-4COTF or
PZ-2BRIA can be
installed
CD-2BRIA
(2 Basic Rate Interface)
2
5
6
23
25
–
PZ-2BRIA
(2 Basic Rate Interface
Daughter Board)
2
5
6
23
25
–
CD-4COTB
(4 Loop/Ground Start Trunk)
2
5
6
23
25
–
PZ-4COTF
(4 Loop/Ground Start Trunk
Daughter Board)
2
5
6
23
25
–
CD-8COTBH
2
5
6
23
25
–
CD-4DIOPA
(4 DID/OPX)
2
5
6
23
50
When installed as a
DID blade
CD-4ODTA
(4 E&M)
2
5
6
23
50
–
CD-PRTA
(1 Primary Rate Interface)
2
4
4
16
8
Blade is used for
Primary Rate
Interface or T-1
Interface
2
2
2
8
23
–
CD-LTA
(8 Digital/2 Single Line)
Trunk Blades:
(8-Port Loop and Ground
Start)
Station/Trunk Blades:
CD-LTDH
(8-Port Digital Station/2Port Analog Station/4-Port
Analog Trunk)
General Description Manual
5 - 11
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 5-4 SV8100 Maximum 9.5” Base and Expansion System Capacities – Blades (Continued)
Hardware
Number of Slot(s) for
Interface Package
9.5”
Base
9.5” Base 9.5” Base
9.5” Base
+
+
+
Expansion Expansion
Networked
Expansion
with CPU
without
Chassis
with CPU
x4
CPU
(NetLink)
Comments
3 Slots
5 Slots
6 Slots
23 Slots
CD-PVAA
(Interactive Voice Response,
Multimedia Conference,
PVA PMS)
1
1
1
1
1
–
CD-PVAA
(CCIS Point-to-Multipoint)
2
5
6
23
32
–
CD-ETIA
(Switching Hub with Power
over Ethernet)
2
3
3
12
64
–
CD-CCTA
(CCIS Trunk Interface/
Common Channel Handler)
2
4
8
8
8
–
CD-RTB
(Router)
1
1
2
7
50
–
CD-VM00
(Voice Mail and Server)
1
1
1
1
1
Maximum of One
per system
Optional Blades:

A PZ-ME50-US is required when more than one CD-LTA is installed. This feature added with Version 3000.
5 - 12
Hardware Specifications
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Table 5-5 Daughter Board Combinations shows each blade and associated
daughter board combinations. The daughter boards that can be mounted on
specific blades are indicated by a checkmark. For example, the CD-LTA can
have a PZ-2BRIA or the PZ-4COTF daughter board mounted.
Table 5-5 Daughter Board Combinations
Daughter Board
PZ-2BRIA PZ-4COTF
PZ-4LCA
PZ-8LCE
PZ-8DLCB
Blades
CD-LTA
(8 Digital/2 Single Line)


–
–
–
CD-4COTB
(4 Loop Ground Start)
–

–
–
–
CD-4LCA
(4 Single Line Interface)
–
–


–
CD-8LCA
(8 Single Line Interface)
–
–


–
CD-8DLCA
(8 Digital Station Interface)
–
–
–
–

CD-16DLCA
(16 Digital Station Interface)
–
–
–
–
–
CD-2BRIA
(2 Basic Rate Interface)

–
–
–
–
– = Does not apply
 = Does apply
1.3
System Trunk/Port/Channel Capacities
The maximum slot and channel capacities are listed in Table 5-6 SV8100 9.5”
Gateway and 19” Maximum System Capacities – Trunks/Ports/Channels and
Table 5-6 SV8100 9.5” Gateway and 19” Maximum System Capacities –
Trunks/Ports/Channels on page 5-14.
Up to four combined CHS2U B-US/CHS2U E (3-Slot Base/3-Slot Expansion)
or CHS2U-US (6-Slot) chassis can be connected locally to reach the system’s
maximum port capacity.
EXAMPLE:
0 CHS2U-US (19” Chassis) & 4 CHS2U B-US/CHS2U E (9.5” Base Chassis/9.5”
Expansion Chassis)
1 CHS2U-US (19” Chassis) & 3 CHS2U B-US/CHS2U E (9.5” Base Chassis/9.5”
Expansion Chassis)
2 CHS2U-US (19” Chassis) & 2 CHS2U B-US/CHS2U E (9.5” Base Chassis/9.5”
Expansion Chassis)
General Description Manual
5 - 13
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
3 CHS2U-US (19” Chassis) & 1 CHS2U B-US/CHS2U E (9.5” Base Chassis/9.5”
Expansion Chassis)
4 CHS2U-US (19” Chassis) & 0 CHS2U B-US/CHS2U E (9.5” Base Chassis/9.5”
Expansion Chassis)
Table 5-6 SV8100 9.5” Gateway and 19” Maximum System Capacities – Trunks/Ports/Channels
9.5”
Chassis
19” Chassis
System
x1
Maximum
x1
x2
x3
X4
(CPU + 2
(6 Slots) (12 Slots) (18 Slots) (24 Slots)
Slots)
Number of:
PCM
48
104
208
312
416
444
Data
7
7
14
21
28
28
Dterm (-48V)
32
80
176
272
368
SLT (-28V)
32
80
176
272
368
SLT (-48V)
8
20
44
68
92
Number of Timeslots 1
Total 512
DtermIP
512
Desktop Applications
(Desktop Client, Desktop Client with
Shared Services and SoftPhones)
128
Total 128
SIP/WLAN
512
Total 512
Analog Trunks (COT)
16
40
88
136
184
BRI
16
40
88
136
184
PRI (1.5M)
48
96
192
192
192
32
32
200
IP Trunk (SIP/K-CCIS – IP)
DTMF Receivers
VoIP Channels
Voice Mail Channels on CPU
5 - 14
Total 200
32
32
32
96 *2
128
128
16 channels
16
Hardware Specifications
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Table 5-6 SV8100 9.5” Gateway and 19” Maximum System Capacities – Trunks/Ports/Channels (Continued)
9.5”
Chassis
19” Chassis
System
x1
Maximum
x1
x2
x3
X4
(CPU + 2
(6 Slots) (12 Slots) (18 Slots) (24 Slots)
Slots)
Number of:
1 channel
V34 Modem
1
1
= For-law countries 104 timeslots per chassis are assigned the G.711 PCM communications (e.g., voice
communications) and 7 timeslots per chassis are assigned for the Data communications (e.g., HDLC over ISDN).
Thus the simultaneous data communications are limited up to seven per chassis.

2 = An additional 64 DTMF Receivers are available when the PZ-BS10 is installed.

An additional 64 DTMF Receivers are available when the PZ-BS10 is installed.
If using Caller ID to analog trunks and DSP resources are set to common, DSP resources will only be used for analog
trunks and not analog stations.
Table 5-7 SV8100 9.5” (Base and Expansion) Maximum System Capacities – Trunks/Ports/Channels
9.5”
Base
9.5” Base + Expansion
System
x1
Maximum
x1
x2
x3
X4
(CPU + 2
(6 Slots) (12 Slots) (18 Slots) (24 Slots)
Slots)
Number of:
PCM
48
104
208
312
416
444
Data
7
7
14
21
28
28
Dterm (-48V)
32
80
176
272
368
SLT (-28V)
32
80
176
272
368
SLT (-48V)
8
20
44
68
92
Number of Timeslots 1
DtermIP
512
512
512
SIP/WLAN
Analog Trunks (COT)
16
40
88
136
184
BRI
16
40
88
136
184
PRI (1.5M)
48
96
192
192
192
IP Trunk (SIP/K-CCIS – IP)
General Description Manual
Total 512
Total 200
200
5 - 15
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 5-7 SV8100 9.5” (Base and Expansion) Maximum System Capacities – Trunks/Ports/Channels (Continued)
9.5”
Base
9.5” Base + Expansion
System
x1
Maximum
x1
x2
x3
X4
(CPU + 2
(6 Slots) (12 Slots) (18 Slots) (24 Slots)
Slots)
Number of:
32
DTMF Receivers
VoIP Channels
Voice Mail Channels on CPU
V34 Modem
32
32
32
96 *2
128
128
16 channels
16
1 channel
1
1
= For-law countries 104 timeslots per chassis are assigned the G.711 PCM communications (e.g., voice
communications) and 7 timeslots per chassis are assigned for the Data communications (e.g., HDLC over ISDN).
Thus the simultaneous data communications are limited up to seven per chassis.
2 = An additional 64 DTMF Receivers are available when the PZ-BS10 is installed.

An additional 64 DTMF Receivers are available when the PZ-BS10 is installed.
If using Caller ID to analog trunks and DSP resources are set to common, DSP resources will only be used for analog
trunks and not analog stations.
SECTION 2
CHASSIS POWER BASED CALCULATOR CHART
The Univerge SV8100 system uses two types of power factors. For a single chassis
chart refer to Table 5-8 Board Power Factor. For the maximum number of specific
blades per package, see Table 5-9 Maximum Number of Packages Installed. Refer to
Table 5-10 Terminal Power Factor on page 5-18 for the Terminal/ Adapter power
chart. Refer to Table 5-11 IP Terminal Power Chart on page 5-19 for the IP Terminal
Power chart and Table 5-12 IEEE802.af Class Specifications on page 5-19 for the
Class Specifications chart.
Table 5-8 Board Power Factor
Board Power Factor
5 - 16
Total
=<7
Item
Power Factor
CD-CP00-US
1
CD-RTB
2
CD-VM00
2
CD-ETIA
2
Hardware Specifications
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Table 5-8 Board Power Factor (Continued)
Board Power Factor
Total
=<7
Item
Power Factor
CD-PVAA
1
PZ-32IPLA
1
PZ-64IPLA
2
PZ-128IPLA
2
PZ-32IPLB
1
PZ-64IPLB
2
PZ-128IPLB
2
CD-SVRU
2
Table 5-9 Maximum Number of Packages Installed
Maximum Number of Package Installed
Board
(Power Factor)
9.5 inch
with CCPU
19 inch
with CCPU
19 inch
without
CCPU
4 x 19 inch
CD-ETIA (2)
2
3
3
12
CD-PVAA (1)
2
5
6
23
CD-RTB (2)
1
2
2
8
CD-SVRU
2
2
3
11
General Description Manual
5 - 17
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 5-10 Terminal Power Factor
Terminal Power Factor
19 inch Metal Chassis with Fan
9.5 inch Plastic Chassis without Fan
Item
Power Factor
DTL-24D-1 TEL
0.8
DTL-8LD-1 TEL
0.8
BHA-L UNIT
2
ADA-L UNIT
2
APR-L UNIT
DT300 series : 2
Dterm series i : 3
BCH-L (BK) UNIT
2
PSA-L UNIT
1.2
8LK-L UNIT
0
DCL-60-1 CONSOLE
2
ITL-320C-1 TEL
6
ITL-24D-1 TEL
4
ITL-2E-1 TEL
4
ITL-6DE-1 TEL
4
SLT (-24V)
0.8
SLT (-48V)
2
PGD(2)-U10 ADP
2
SLT Adapter
5


5 - 18
=<80
=<64
ITL factors are calculated using the CD-ETIA blade.
Power requirements for the 9.5 “ chassis are the same as the
19” chassis.
Hardware Specifications
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Table 5-11 IP Terminal Power Chart
IP
Terminal
IEEE802.
3af
Class
Label Indication
(Maximum Current with All Options)
48VDC
Maximum Current Without Options
24VDC
48VDC
24VDC
ITL-320C-1 TEL
Class 3
160mA
7.7W
290mA
7.0W
111mA
5.3W
192mA
4.6W
ITL-32D-1 TEL
Class 2
130mA
6.2W
235mA
5.6W
90mA
4.3W
153mA
3.7W
ITL-8LD-1 TEL
Class 2
130mA
6.2W
235mA
5.6W
81mA
3.9W
137mA
3.3W
ITL-24D-1 TEL
Class 2
130mA
6.2W
235mA
5.6W
81mA
3.9W
137mA
3.3W
ITL-12D-1 TEL
Class 2
130mA
6.2W
235mA
5.6W
81mA
3.9W
137mA
3.3W
ITL-24PA-1 TEL
Class 2
130mA
6.2W
235mA
5.6W
–
0.0W
–
0.0W
ITL-24PD-1 TEL
Class 2
130mA
6.2W
235mA
5.6W
–
0.0W
–
0.0W
ITL-24BT-1 TEL
Class 2
130mA
6.2W
235mA
5.6W
–
0.0W
–
0.0W
ITL-6DE-1 TEL
Class 1
68mA
3.3W
122mA
2.9W
68mA
3.3W
122mA
2.9W
ITL-2E-1 TEL
Class 1
68mA
3.3W
122mA
2.9W
68mA
3.3W
122mA
2.9W
Label Indication:
IP Value/Sophisticated – Maximum watts when adding options or modular upgrades.
IP Value – Maximum watts when ITL-12D-1 TEL is changed to ITL-8LD-1 TEL or ITL-24D-1 TEL.
Table 5-12 IEEE802.af Class Specifications
IEEE802.3af
General Description Manual
Minimum
Maximum
Class 4
–
–
Class 3
6.49W
12.95W
Class 2
3.84W
6.49W
Class 1
0.44W
3.84W
Class 0
0.44W
12.95W
5 - 19
Issue 10.0
SECTION 3
UNIVERGE SV8100
TRAFFIC CAPACITY
Table 5-13 Traffic Capacity provides information about the traffic capacity for the
basic system package and expanded system package.
Table 5-13 Traffic Capacity
Traffic Capacity
Basic System
Package
Expanded System
Package
4800 BHCA
4800 BHCA
Traffic Capacity
(CD-CP00-US)

4800 Busy-Hour Call Attempts (BHCA) is based on a 176Trunk/240 station
configuration.
The CD-CP00-US provides:

200 trunk ports maximum

512 extension ports maximum
512 ports digital/IP extensions maximum
256 analog ports maximum


256 virtual extensions
Connection for 32/64/128 VoIP Daughter Board PZ-32/64/128 IPLA or PZ-32/64/
128 IPLB)
5 - 20

Connection for Voice Mail Daughter Board (PZ-VM21)

Connection for Expanded Memory (PZ-ME50-US)

Supports TAPI 1.x

One Green Status LED

Four Red Status LEDs

Five diagnostic LEDs which indicate the status of various system functions

During normal operation, the RUN LED is flashing and the remaining LEDs are
off.

700x700 Time Division Multiplex Switch (TDM Switch)

Digital Phase Locked Loop (DPLL)
Hardware Specifications
UNIVERGE SV8100
SECTION 4
Issue 10.0
CABLING REQUIREMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS
This section provides cabling requirements and specifications for various equipment
used in the SV8100 system.
Only the DT300/DT700, Dterm Series i telephones, single line telephones, cordless
telephones and wireless telephones discussed in the document can be installed on
the SV8100 system.
To avoid damage to equipment, do not install the
Dterm70 on the SV8100 system. The Dterm70 (DTU/
DTP) terminal uses -24V and has no protection from
the -48V power supply used by the SV8100 system.
Figure 5-4 Connecting the DLC Using Twisted 2-Pair Cable is a diagram of the
chassis connected with each of the multiline terminals and single line telephones by a
separate twisted 1-pair cable or 2-pair cable (only for multiline terminals).
Twisted 2-Pair Cable
RJ-11
DLC
Multiline Terminal
Figure 5-4 Connecting the DLC Using Twisted 2-Pair Cable
Refer to the following tables for cabling requirements and specifications:

Table 5-14 DT300 Series Loop Resistance and Cable Length

Table 5-15 DT700 Series Loop Resistance and Cable Length

Table 5-16 Dterm Series i or Dterm IP Terminal Loop Resistance and Cable
Length

Table 5-17 Cable Connection Between the Analog Port and the Single Line
Equipment

Table 5-18 Cabling Requirements
General Description Manual
5 - 21
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 5-14 DT300 Series Loop Resistance and Cable Length
Terminal or Adapter
By Twisted 1-Pair
Cable (without
AC Adapter)
24 AWG
DTL-2E-1 (BK) TEL
1,969 ft (600m)
DTL-6DE-1 (BK) TEL
1,969 ft (600m)
DTL-12E-1 (BK) TEL
1,969 ft (600m)
DTL-8LD-1 (BK) TEL
DTL-8LD-1 (WH) TEL
1,969 ft (600m)
DTL-12BT-1 (BK) TEL
1,969 ft (600m)
DTL-12PA-1 (BK) TEL
1,969 ft (600m)
DTL-12D-1 (BK) TEL
DTL-12D-1 (WH) TEL
1,969 ft (600m)
DTL-24D-1(BK) TEL
DTL-24D-1(WH) TEL
1,969 ft (600m)
DTL-32D-1 (BK) TEL
DTL-32D-1 (WH) TEL
1,969 ft (600m)
DCL-60-1 Console
1,969 ft (600m)
 An AC Adapter is required.
Table 5-15 DT700 Series Loop Resistance and Cable Length
Terminal or Adapter
5 - 22
Ethernet Cable
ITL-2E-1 (BK) TEL
Cat 5/Cat 6 Ethernet
328.1 ft (100m)
ITL-6DE-1 (BK) TEL
Cat 5/Cat 6 Ethernet
328.1 ft (100m)
ITL-8LDE-1 (BK) TEL
Cat 5/Cat 6 Ethernet
328.1 ft (100m)
ITL-8LD-1 (BK) TEL
ITL-8LD-1 (WH) TEL
Cat 5/Cat 6 Ethernet
328.1 ft (100m)
ITL-12D-1 (BK) TEL
ITL-12D-1 (WH) TEL
Cat 5/Cat 6 Ethernet
328.1 ft (100m)
ITL-12PA-1 (BK) TEL
Cat 5/Cat 6 Ethernet
328.1 ft (100m)
ITL-24D-1 (BK) TEL
ITL-24D-1 (WH) TEL
Cat 5/Cat 6 Ethernet
328.1 ft (100 m)
ITL-32D-1 (BK) TEL
ITL-32D-1 (WH) TEL
Cat 5/Cat 6 Ethernet
328.1 ft (100m)
Hardware Specifications
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Table 5-15 DT700 Series Loop Resistance and Cable Length (Continued)
Terminal or Adapter
ITL-32OC-1 (BK) TEL
Ethernet Cable
Cat 5/Cat 6 Ethernet
328.1 ft (100m)
Table 5-16 Dterm Series i or Dterm IP Terminal Loop Resistance and Cable Length
Maximum
Loop
Resistance
(without AC
Adapter)
(Ohms)
By Twisted
1-Pair Cable
(without AC
Adapter)
24 AWG
By Twisted
2-Pair Cable
(without AC
Adapter)
24 AWG
Maximum
Loop
Resistance
(with AC
Adapter)
(Ohms)
By Twisted
1-Pair Cable
(with AC
Adapter)
24 AWG
By Twisted
2-Pair Cable
(with AC
Adapter)
24 AWG
DTH-8-1 TEL
DTR-8-1 TEL
37
700
1400
107
2000
2000
DTH-8D-1 TEL
DTR-8D-1 TEL
37
700
1400
107
2000
2000
DTH-16-1 TEL
DTR-16-1 TEL
35
660
1320
107
2000
2000
DTH-16D-1 TEL
DTR-16D-1 TEL
35
660
1320
107
2000
2000
DTH-32D-1 TEL
DTR-32D-1 TEL
26
500
1000
107
2000
2000
DTH-16LD-1 TEL
37
700
1400
107
2000
2000
—
—
—
107
2000
2000
Terminal or
Adapter
DCR-60-1
Console
 An AC Adapter is required.
Table 5-17 Cable Connection Between the Analog Port and the Single Line Equipment
Cable
Maximum Feet from Connected
Equipment to Telephone
ADA-L UNIT
Twisted Pair
9.5 ft (2.89m)
APR-L UNIT
Twisted Pair
50 ft (15.24m)
PSA-L UNIT
Twisted Pair
1,700 ohms
GBA-L UNIT
Twisted Pair
N/A
LCA
Twisted Pair
600 ohms (Including the SLT)
OPX
Twisted Pair
1500 ohms or less (Including the SLT)
Connected Equipment

General Description Manual
Mixing digital and analog ports through the same 25-pair cable runs is not recommended.
5 - 23
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 5-18 Cabling Requirements
Connected Equipment
SECTION 5
Cable
Music on Hold and Background Music Sources
Hi-Fi Shielded Audio Cable
External Amplifier
Hi-Fi Shielded Audio Cable
ITL Cabling
Cat 5 Straight Data Network
Cable – 328.1 ft (100m)
maximum distance.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
A dedicated 100VAC/120VAC/220VAC/230 – 240VAC 50Hz/60Hz circuit located within
seven feet of the chassis is required. A separate dedicated outlet for each chassis
should be installed.
Double Pole/Neutral Fusing (power supply fuses are located at
both the L and N side).
5.1
Power Supply Specifications
AC Power Supply:

Dedicated 15 Amp circuit

Power Requirements: 120 VAC @ 15A Controlling/Base Chassis

Power Consumption: Base Chassis=263VA,
Expansion Chassis=263VA, total 1052VA

Input Voltage: 90VAC to 264VAC
(Rated Voltage: 100VAC/120VAC/220VAC - 240VAC)

Frequency: 47Hz – 63Hz (Rated frequency: 50/60Hz)

Phase and Wire: Single Phase, 2 Line + PE Type

Grounding Requirements: No. 14 AWG copper wire

Feeding Voltage: Dterm/OPX/DID: -48V
SLT: 25mA / -28V
With input voltage of 120 VAC and with full load conditions:
5 - 24

Output Power: Base chassis=130W, Expansion chassis=130W, total 520W

AC Input I: Base chassis=2.19A, Expansion chassis=2.19A, total 8.76A

VA @ 120V: Base chassis=263VA, Expansion chassis=263VA,
total 1052VA
Hardware Specifications
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0

KWh @ AC Input I x 120V/1000: Base chassis=0.263 KWh,
Expansion chassis=0.263 KWh, total 1.052 KWh

BTU (KWh x 3413): Base chassis=898 BTU,
Expansion chassis=898 BTU, total 3592 BTU

A dedicated outlet, separately fused and grounded for each chassis should
be installed
Double Pole/Neutral Fusing (power supply fuses are
located at both the L and N side).
5.2
Power Supply Consumption
Table 5-19 Power Consumption
Maximum
RMS
Current
Watts Used
(Idle)
Watts Used
(Maximum)
Basic Chassis – CD-CP00-US Chassis
2.19A
96
130
Basic Chassis + Expansion Chassis
4.38A
192
260
Basic Chassis + 2 Expansion Chassis
6.57A
288
390
Basic Chassis + 3 Expansion Chassis
8.76A
384
520
Chassis
SECTION 6
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
6.1
Temperature and Humidity
Chassis, Telephones, BCH, BHA, 16LK, Console, ADA, APR

Operating Temperature: +32°F ~ +104°F (0°C ~ 40°C)

Recommended Long Term Temperature: -4°F ~ +140°F (-20°C ~ 60°C)

Operating Humidity: 10 ~ 90% RH (non-condensing)

Recommended Long Term Humidity: 10 ~ 90% RH
Blades/Daughter Boards – PZ-BS10, PZ-BS11, PZ-VM21, PZ-ME50-US,
CD-8DLCA, CD-16DLCA, PZ-8DLCB

Operating Temperature: +32°F ~ +104oF (0oC ~ 40oC)

Recommended Long Term Temperature: -4°F ~ +140°F (-20°C ~ 60°C)

Humidity: 10 ~ 90% RH (non-condensing)

Recommended Long Term Humidity: 10 ~ 90% RH
General Description Manual
5 - 25
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Blades/Daughter Boards – CD-4LCA, PZ-4LCA, CD-8LCA, PZ-8LCE,
CD-4COTB, PZ-4COTF, CD-PRTA

Operating Temperature: +32°F ~ +104°F (0°C ~ 40°C)

Recommended Long Term Temperature: -4°F ~ +140°F (-20°C ~ 60°C)

Operating Humidity: 10 ~ 90% RH (non-condensing)

Recommended Long Term Humidity: 20 ~ 90% RH
Door Box

Operating Temperature: -4°F ~ +104oF (-20oC ~ 60oC

Operating Humidity: 20 ~ 80% (non-condensing)
SV8100 Power Supply – MPS7101
6.2

Operating Temperature: +32°F ~ +104°F (0oC ~ +40oC)

Recommended Long Term Temperature: -4F ~ 167oF (-40oC ~ 75oC)

Operating Humidity: 20 ~ 95% RH (non-condensing)

Recommended Long Term Humidity: 10 ~ 95% RH
Outside Line Types
The following outside lines can be used with the UNIVERGE SV8100 system.

2-wire, Loop Start or Ground Start Trunks

2-wire, 2-way DID Lines (Dial Pulse or DTMF)

5 - 26
DID feature is not available for European and Australian markets.

4-wire, E&M Tie Lines (Type I or V, Dial Pulse, or DTMF)

Digital Trunk T1/FT1 (Loop Start, Ground Start, Tie Line (E&M), or DID
Signaling)

ISDN-BRI Trunks

ISDN-PRI Trunks

VoIP Trunks (Internet Protocols)
Hardware Specifications
UNIVERGE SV8100
6.3
Issue 10.0
Transmission, Network, and Control Specifications
6.3.1
Transmission

Data Length:
From multiline terminal to CD-8DLCA: 23 bits
From CD-8DLCA to multiline terminal: 23 bits

Data Transmission Rates:
Between CD-8DLCA and multiline terminal: 184K bps (voice and
signaling)

6.3.2
Scanning Time for each multiline terminal: 32ms.
Network
Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) allows transmission of data and
voice simultaneously over one communications medium. The
specifications that the UNIVERGE SV8100 system uses for
switching, clock, data bus, and timeframe are shown below.
6.3.3

TDM Switching: PCM (µ Law)

TDM Clock: 2.048 MHz

TDM Data Bus: 8-bit

TDM Timeframe: 125 µs.
Control
This section indicates the speed or capacity:
General Description Manual

Control: Stored program with distributed processing

Central Processor: 32-bit microprocessor

Clock: 266 MHz

Interface Blade: 8- or 16-bit microprocessor

Optional Blades: 16- or 32-bit microprocessor

Multiline Terminal (TDM): 8-bit microprocessor

Multiline Terminal (IP): 32-bit microprocessor

IP Adapter: 32-bit microprocessor

Attendant Console: 4-bit microprocessor

SLT Adapter: 4-bit microprocessor
5 - 27
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
6.3.4
Electra Elite IPK Terminals and Equipment
The voltage, current, and ring signal for the Electra Elite IPK multiline
terminals, Single Line Telephone equipment, and AP(A)-R/AP(R)-R
Units are listed below:

Multiline Terminal
Voltage: -11 ~ -26 Vdc
Maximum Current: 250 mA
Acoustical characteristics meet Electronic Industry
Association (EIA) standard proposal SP-1286 and
standard EIA RS-470.

Single Line Telephone
Standard 2500 Set: 500 type network
Nominal Current: 25 mA
Ring Signal: 56 Vac RMS @ 20 Hz

SLTII(1)-U( ) ADP
Standard 2500 Set: 500 type network
Nominal Current: 30 mA
Ring Signal: 56 Vac RMS @ 20 Hz

AP(A)-R Unit
Standard 2500 Set: 500 type network
Nominal Current: 30 mA

AP(R)-R Unit
Standard 2500 Set: 500 type network
Nominal Current: 30 mA
Ring Signal: 56 Vac RMS @ 20 Hz
5 - 28
Hardware Specifications
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
6.3.5
Series i Terminals

The voltage and current for the Dterm Series i multiline terminals are
listed below:
Voltage: -11 ~ -48 Vdc
Maximum Current: 250 mA
Acoustical characteristics meet Electronic Industry
Association (EIA) standard proposal SP-1286 and
standard EIA RS-470.

6.4
Voltage, current, and ring signal information for Single Line Telephone
equipment, AP(A)-R Unit, and AP(R)-R Unit are the same a those listed
in the previous paragraph.
Dialing Specifications
6.4.1
Dial Pulse Address Signaling
Dial Pulse Address Signaling uses dial pulses (regular momentary
interruptions) to signal the equipment. The following Dial Pulse
specifications are used In the UNIVERGE SV8100 system.
6.4.2

Pulse Rate: 10 ± 0.5 pps/20 ± 1.0 pps

Percent Break: 60 ± 1.5%

Interdigit Interval: 0 pps/20 pps 770ms. ~ 830ms.
Dual-Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) Address Signaling
DTMF signaling includes push button or Touchtone dialing. When a
key on a telephone is pushed, two tones (one high frequency and
one low frequency) are provided. In the UNIVERGE SV8100 system,
the following DTMF specifications are used.

Frequencies
Two sinusoidal frequencies are provided, one from the high frequency
group and one from the low frequency group.

Frequency Deviation: Less than ±1.5%

Signal Level:
Nominal level per frequency: -6 ~ -4 dBm
Minimum level per frequency
Low Group: -10 dBm
High Group: -8 dBm
Maximum level per frequency: 0 dBm
General Description Manual
5 - 29
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100

Rise Time: Within 5ms.

Duration of Dual Frequency Signal:
110 ms. default/60ms. minimum
Interdigital Time: 140ms. default/45 ms. minimum
Nominal High Group
Frequencies (Hz)
1209
Nominal Low Group
Frequencies (Hz)
6.4.3
6.4.4
6.4.5
6.4.6
5 - 30
1336
1477
697
1
2
3
770
4
5
6
852
7
8
9
941
Q
0
#
External Equipment Connection

Door Phone or TV Door Phone

External Speaker via amplifier

External music source for MOH and BGM

Tape recorder for voice recording via PGD(2)-U10 ADP

Door Lock/Release or General Purpose Relay via PGD(2)-U10 ADP

Printer for SMDR by LAN

PC by LAN
Music Source for Music on Hold via Chassis

Auxiliary Input: 0.6V PPS Signal Level

Input Impedance: 600 
Music Source for Station Background Music via ACI

Auxiliary Input: 0.6V PPS Signal Level

Input Impedance: 600 
External Paging (Audio)

Output Power: –10 dBm Signal Level

Output Impedance: 600 

Relay Contact Rating: 500 mA, 24 Vdc
Hardware Specifications
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
6.4.7
6.4.8
External Tone Ringer/Night Chime Output

Output Level: –10 dBm

Output Impedance: 600 

Relay Contact Rating: 500 mA, 24 Vdc
SMDR Output

6.4.9
PC Connection

6.4.10
Female Connector (LAN) Standard DB-9 (straight)
Relay Contact

SECTION 7
Female Connector (LAN) Standard DB-9 (straight)
All Relay Contact Ratings: 500 mA, 24Vdc
BATTERY BACKUP
The UNIVERGE SV8100 system has battery backup functions for system backup and
for memory backup.
7.1
System Backup (Optional)
During a power failure, the system can be backed up using the CHS2U BATT
MTG KIT for a backup time of 10 minutes or one of the CHS LARGE BATT
SETs for a backup time ranging from 45~180 minutes. The CHS2U GW-US
can be backed up using the CHSGW SMALL BATT BOX for a backup time of
10 minutes.
7.2
Memory Backup
The CD-CP00-US blade battery retains the Clock/Calender and Last Number
redial (LNR) buffers for each station when the CD-CP00-US blade encounters
a power loss. With a fully charged battery, the settings are retained for about
three years. The System Programmed memory (Customer Database) is
stored in nonvolatile Memory and can be erased only by a First Initialization.
After power is restored, the system blade returns to normal operation.
General Description Manual
5 - 31
Issue 10.0
SECTION 8
UNIVERGE SV8100
SV8100 MIGRATION
8.1
Description
The MGN-U10 ETU is supported only in the B64-U10, U20 and U30 KSU’s.
The MGN-U10 ETU is available only with the SV8100 system.
The MGN-U10 ETU provides a connection between the IPK/IPK II and the
UNIVERGE SV8100 system. The MGN-U10 ETU is installed in the CPU/Ext
slot of the IPK/IPK II KSU.
IPK/IPKII Migration is supported only with the CHS2U-US (6-slot) chassis.
The CHS2U GW-US (3-slot) chassis is not supported.
A single SV8100 chassis is supported in an IPK/IPK II Migration system.
8.2
SECTION 9
Conditions

The IPK/IPKII systems are limited to 18 total card slots.

An IPK system can support the migration card, provided the cards and
terminals are listed below as being supported. It may be necessary to
upgrade firmware as noted.

MEGACO is not supported.
AUDIBLE AND VISUAL INDICATION
9.1
Tone Patterns
Table 5-20 Tone Patterns lists the frequency and the pattern for the tones.
Tones are used to inform UNIVERGE SV8100 station users of system
functions such as dial tone, busy tone, or ringback tone.
9.2
Multiline Terminal LED Flash Patterns
The UNIVERGE SV8100 system has 2-color LEDs. Green is used primarily
for I-Use conditions and for outside calls. Red is used primarily for Other Use
conditions and internal calls. Refer to Table 5-21 Multiline Terminal LED Flash
Pattern.
5 - 32
Hardware Specifications
UNIVERGE SV8100
Issue 10.0
Table 5-20 Tone Patterns
System Tone
(Fixed)
Frequency (Hz)
(Fixed)
Intermit
(Default)
480/620
60 IPM
Busy Tone
Cycle
0.5 sec
0.5 sec
Call Waiting Tone
440
0.5 sec
60 IPM
0.5 sec
Second Dial Tone
350/440
120 IPM
0.25 sec
0.25 sec
2400 Modulation
(16 Hz)
Continuous
Internal Dial Tone
350/440
Continuous
Internal Ringback Tone
440/480
1 sec On
2 sec Off
Howler Tone
LCR Dial Tone
440
Continuous
Reorder Tone
480/620
120 IPM
1 sec
2 sec
0.25 sec
0.25 sec
Service Set Tone
440
Continuous
0.125 sec
Special Dial Tone
440
240 IPM
0.125 sec
1 sec
Tone Burst 1 Tone
440
Continuous
Tone Burst 2 Tone
620
Continuous
Tie/DID Ringback Tone
440/480
2 sec On
4 sec Off
Camp-On Tone
Call Alert Notification
Attendant Tone Override
440
Continuous
0.7 sec
DIT Alert Tone
480/620
Continuous
0.5 sec
Call Forward Alert Tone
Call Forward
Configuration Tone
350/440
120 IPM
General Description Manual
1 sec
2 sec
4 sec
0.25 sec ON x 2~3
5 - 33
Issue 10.0
UNIVERGE SV8100
Table 5-21 Multiline Terminal LED Flash Pattern
LED
Condition
Color
I-Use
Busy
Incoming Call
I-Hold
Call Hold
Hold Recall
Transfer Recall
Live Monitoring Mode
Message Waiting on Line Key
Green
Red
Red
Green
Red
Green
Green
Green
Red
ON
Red
ON (Series i)
Red
Large
LED 1
Incoming Internal Call
Incoming Outside Call
Message from Attendant
Voice Mail Message
Red
Green
Green
Red
Speaker
ON
System Data Entry
Red
Red
Answer
Incoming Trunk
Exclusive Hold
User Ringing Line Preference
Voice Over with Broker’s Call
Red
Green
Red
Green
Feature
Callback Set
Auto Repeat Set
ON (to set function)
Call FWD - All Calls Set
Red
Red
Red
Red
Use, Hold
DND, Call FWD-All Calls Set
Special Mode (while pressing
Feature or going off-line)
Red
Red
Red
Line Key
Microphone
Mic
BLF or
DSS Key
Flash Patterns
0

0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0 sec.
1 = The Large LED provides the user a variety of programmable colors and preferences.
5 - 34
Hardware Specifications
®
GENERAL DESCRIPTION MANUAL
NEC Corporation of America
Issue 10.0
(Version 7000)
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement